JP2019037503A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing occurrence of trouble caused by attachment to a second specific mechanism body.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board 2; and a game frame capable of attaching and detaching the game board 2. The game board 2 includes a performance control CPU 120 as control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and is attachable/detachable to a plurality of kinds of game frames (for example, dedicated frames and common frames). The game frames include detection means (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A, or the like) capable of detecting operation means loaded to the game frames and a state of a movable body. The performance control CPU 120 determines whether the game frames attached to the game board 2 are dedicated frames or common frames based on detection specific information (serial data received from a serial conversion IC 130) outputted from the game frames, and performs notification when determining that the game frames are dedicated (or common) frames.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  As a gaming machine, a first mechanism body (for example, a game board or a front door) and a second mechanism body (for example, a game frame or a housing) to which the first mechanism body can be attached and detached are provided. There are pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like provided with control means (for example, effect control means) that can control the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body.

  As this type of gaming machine, for example, the control means provided in the game board (first mechanism body) detects an abnormal state of the movable body operably provided in the game frame (second mechanism body). There are those that can perform predetermined abnormality notification based on the above (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2006-67424, A

  In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, when a game board that does not correspond to a game frame having a movable body (for example, a game board corresponding to a specific game frame of a different type) is mounted, the control means causes the abnormality of the movable body. There has been a problem that a malfunction such as ignition of the motor or the like may occur by outputting a drive signal to the motor or the like without being able to be recognized.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said situation, and it aims at providing the game machine which can prevent generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by mounting | wearing with a specific 2nd mechanism body.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is:
A first mechanism (for example, a game board 2 / variable display unit) and a second mechanism (for example, a game frame / main body portion comprising an opening / closing frame 50 and a gaming machine frame 3) that is detachable from the first mechanism. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A, 1B / slot machine),
The first mechanism body has a control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body, and includes a plurality of types of second mechanism bodies including a specific second mechanism body ( For example, it can be attached to and detached from a dedicated frame and a common frame)
The second mechanism body can detect a plurality of detection means for detecting the state of the second mechanism body (for example, the game frame can detect the operation means mounted on the game frame and the state (position) of the movable body. Stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body opening position sensor 39B, etc. ) And can output detection specific information that can specify the detection state of each detection means to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame indicates the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131) It is possible to generate identifiable serial data and output it to the production control board 12).
The control means determines whether or not the specific second mechanism is attached to the first mechanism based on detection specific information output from the second mechanism, and the specific second Notification is made when it is determined to be a mechanism (for example, the production control CPU 120 received from the serial conversion IC 130 in S61B to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B). (The part which determines the kind of game frame based on serial data, and performs either alerting | reporting A-C based on the determination result in S67, S73, S86.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by being attached to the specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The control means determines whether or not it is the specific second mechanism based on a specific signal output from the second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the third initialization process in S51B). S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87, the serial data of a specific port number (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) is specified, A part for determining whether the specified serial data is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The control means determines whether or not the specific second mechanism is based on an input time of a specific signal output from the second mechanism (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the third control of S51B is the third one. In the initialization process, a part for determining whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The control means determines whether or not the specific second mechanism body is based on a plurality of specific signals output from the second mechanism body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third initial stage of S51B). Serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 And determining whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the specified serial data.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be suitably determined whether or not it is the specific second mechanism.

A gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The second mechanism (for example, a game frame comprising the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3)
Including operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) operable by the player,
Detection specific information that can specify the detection state of the detection means for detecting the operation of the operation means can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 has a stick controller 31A to the input port 131 or a push button. (The part which can generate | occur | produce the serial data which can specify the input state of the detection signal from 31B, and can output it to the production | presentation control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality.

A gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The second mechanism (for example, a game frame comprising the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3)
Including a movable body (for example, a dedicated frame rocket 45, a cover body 48, a stick controller 31A, etc.),
Drive specifying information that can specify the drive state of the movable body can be output to the control means (for example, the serial conversion IC 130 has a vibration motor 35C, a rocket motor 37C, a cover body motor 39C, a stick motor to the input port 131) (The part which can generate the serial data which can specify the input state of the drive signal from 35D, and can output to the production | presentation control board 12.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, occurrence of abnormal operation can be prevented.

A gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, wherein
The control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is a notification means (for example, the effect display devices 5 and 5A, the effect LED 9) provided in common for a plurality of types of second mechanisms (for example, a dedicated frame and a common frame). Etc.).
According to this feature, any type of second mechanism can be appropriately notified.

A gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The game can be executed even if the control means notifies,
Limiting the use of the detection target that is the notification target (for example, the game control CPU 120 performs a game while the movable body in which the error information is stored in the third initialization process of S51B is in a dead-end state) The part that can be.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, occurrence of abnormality can be prevented.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and the structure other than this invention specific matter is included with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. You may have.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine 1A as an Example of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which a gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1A of FIG. 1 is opened. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine 1B as an Example of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the frame for gaming machines of the pachinko gaming machine 1B of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which compares the kind of operation means and movable body mounted in a special frame and a common frame. It is a block diagram which shows the wiring connection state of the detection means on a game frame side, and an effect control board. (A) is a dedicated frame, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship with various electronic components connected to each input port of a serial conversion IC of a common frame. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 2nd initialization process which CPU for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 2nd initialization process which CPU for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 3rd initialization process which CPU for production control performs. (A)-(F) is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting which CPU for production control performs in a 3rd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A)-(F) is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect as the modification 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the 3rd initialization process as the modification 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of the production control main process as the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the principal part of the game frame and game board as the modification 4 of this invention. (A) is a front view which shows a window part unit, (B) is a rear view which shows a window part unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the window part unit from diagonally forward, (B) is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the window part unit from diagonally behind. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the window part unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the window part unit from diagonally back. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a cylindrical part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the internal structure of the opening-and-closing frame and the frame for game machines. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from diagonally forward. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the side. It is a timing chart which shows an example of operation of each movable object in a movable body production, and LED for production. (A) is the schematic which looked at the light emission aspect of LED for an effect and movable body LED from the side, (B) is the schematic diagram which looked at the light emission aspect of LED for an effect and movable body LED from upper direction. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a standby state indicating the normal time of the effect display device, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and (C) shows a second operation state of the effect display device. FIG. It is the schematic which shows the state which open | released the opening-and-closing frame in the 2nd operation | movement form of a movable body unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the main effect control commands transmitted and set by special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the processing content performed by command analysis processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process, (B) is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in S57. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a movable body effect setting process, and (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of determining a movable body effect in the case of super reach A. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of a composite production. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a two-stage operation of a first movable body according to Modification Example 5. FIG. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the movable body effect in the case of the modification 5, another example 1, and another example 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of various notices, (B), (C) is a figure which shows the example of determination of a movable body effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the movable body effect at the time of reach advance notice, and the time of a turn effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows operating on the circular-arc path | route of the 1st movable body of the modification 6A. It is explanatory drawing which shows rocking | fluctuation operation | movement of the 1st movable body of the modification 6B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the multi-position stop of the 1st movable body of the modification 6C. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of modification 6D, (B) is a diagram for explaining the guide holes and the like of the partition plate. It is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of a modification 7. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window part unit of the modification 8. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a fixed ball passage according to Modification 9, and (B) and (C) are longitudinal cross-sectional views showing a mobile ball passage according to Modification 9. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 10, (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit as another example, (D ) Is a side view of (C). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd transparent body of the modification 11, and the frame for game machines. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification Example 12, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification Example 13. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the cylindrical body of the modification 14, (B) is a figure which shows the example from which the light emission mode in the cylindrical body of the modification 14 changes in steps. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the cylindrical body of the modification 15, (B) is a figure which shows the example from which the light emission aspect in the cylindrical body of the modification 15 changes in steps. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification Example 16, and (B) is a front view showing an effect mode of light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body of the modification 17. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a movable body effect execution process according to Modification 18; It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the 1st movable body of the modification 18, and a 2nd movable body. (A) (B) is a longitudinal section showing a window unit of modification 19. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state which the window part unit of the modification 20 is located in a 1st visual recognition position, (B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the state which the window part unit moved to the 2nd visual recognition position. The flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 20, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frame operation effect in the case of super reach B, (C) is the determination of the movable body effect in the case of super reach B. It is a figure which shows an example. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of modification 21 from the front. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the operation example of the frame side movable body of the modification 21. FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modification 21, (B) is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frame side movable body effect in the case of super reach B, (C) is the case of 2nd operation pattern PTB-2. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the frame side movable body effect. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the deformation | transformation operation | movement of the 1st movable body of the modification 22, (B) is a front view which shows the magnitude | size relationship etc. of the 1st movable body shown to (A), and the hole of a 2nd permeation | transmission body. It is. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a deformation operation of the first movable body in Modification Example 23.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1A that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is viewed from the front side. This will be explained as a standard. Note that the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the present embodiment is an opposing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1A (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) having a gaming board surface on the front side, and a gaming machine frame that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. 3 (underframe). The gaming board 2 is detachable from the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming board 2 has a substantially circular gaming area (also referred to as “game section”) 10 surrounded by the guide rail 2 b in front view. Is formed. The game area 10 is an area in which a game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) and driven, and the game ball that has been driven can flow down.

  The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with an opening / closing frame 50 provided with a window 51 for visually recognizing the gaming area 10 so as to be rotatable around the left side. The opening / closing frame 50 defines the gaming area 10. The game area 10 can be seen through the window 51 when the open / close frame 50 is closed. The opening / closing frame 50 is formed to have a size that can cover the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, and a player or the like below the window 51 in order to launch a game ball toward the gaming area. A hitting operation handle 30 (operation knob) to be operated is provided.

  A rocket 45 as a movable body that is movable in the front-rear direction between an origin position and a projecting position that projects forward from the origin position is provided on the front surface of the hitting operation handle 30. It can be driven back and forth by a rocket motor 37C provided inside. Further, inside the hitting operation handle 30, it is detected that the rocket 45 is at the origin position, and a rocket origin position sensor 37A that outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12 and that the rocket 45 is at the projecting position are detected. And the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B which outputs a detection signal to the presentation control board 12 is provided.

  The game board 2 is formed from a synthetic resin material (transmissible member) having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin or the like in a front view, and has a obstruction nail (not shown) on the front game board surface. ) And guide rails 2b (see FIG. 3) and the like, and a spacer member (not shown) that is integrally attached to the rear side of the board surface plate. . The game board 2 of the present embodiment is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, but is not limited to this, and is made into a substantially square shape in front view with a non-light-transmissive member such as a plywood board. It may be configured.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10). These consist of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is a special symbol (special identification information) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. Is also displayed so as to be variable (also referred to as variable display or variable display). The special symbol variable display (variable display) means that a plurality of types of special symbols are changed (displayed in a variable manner) by update display or the like (the same applies to other variable displays). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (displayed) as a display result (variable display result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . The special figure game of the first special figure is also called “first special figure game”, and the special figure game of the second special figure is also called “second special figure game”.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2, effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are provided. The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and form display areas for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5A, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4B in the special game are respectively displayed. (For example, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game), for example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5C, which are a plurality of variable display units such as three. , 5R, the effect symbols (decorative symbols), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be distinguished from each other, are variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  In this way, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols each of which can be identified is performed, and a definite effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 1, the display area of the effect display device 5A includes movable bodies (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and fourth movable body 600L, which will be described later). 600R) includes a specific game information display area 5Z for displaying specific game information (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) regarding the game. ing. A small symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol game and is smaller than the effect symbol, and a second small symbol variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game and smaller than the effect symbol. included. The small symbols may be displayed constantly or displayed only for a predetermined period. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the current variation display (variable display) is in progress. The right-handed display is a display that prompts the player to operate the hitting operation handle so that the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 10. In this embodiment, a part of the display area of the effect display device 5A is the specific game information display area 5Z, but the specific game information display area 5Z is provided in at least one display area of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. May be. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a specific game information display device (for example, LED, lamp, 7 segment LED, liquid crystal display device, etc.).

  The effect display devices 5X and 5Y are approximately half the width of the display screen than the effect display device 5A, and are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A so as to be movable and rotatable as described later. In the present embodiment, variation display of the effect symbol and various effects are mainly performed in the center effect display device 5A, and effects related to the effect display device 5A are performed in the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. However, in place of the effect display device 5A, a change display of the effect symbol may be performed, or an effect separate from the effect display device 5A may be performed.

  Further, these effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be seen through an opening 2c formed in the game board 2. In the present embodiment, part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be visually recognized through the panel board 200. In addition, a frame-shaped center decorative frame 52 is provided in the opening 2 c in the game board 2.

  A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right of the display area of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y. In the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U, the hold memory display for displaying the variable hold memory number (the special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified. That is, in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, a hold display image corresponding to the special game that is being executed is displayed.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1A is controlled to the big hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  At the right side position of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Is provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. For example, each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first special figure reserved memory number (the number of reserved memories in the first special figure game is determined depending on the number of lighted LEDs. ) And the second special figure hold memory number (the second special figure game hold memory number).

  Below the effect display device 5A, an ordinary winning ball device 6A is provided, and below the effect display device 5Y, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is switched between a closed state in which it protrudes into the game area 10 and an open position in which it retracts from the game area 10 by the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A normal electric accessory having a movable plate that changes is provided, and a second start winning opening is formed as a start area (second start area).

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. In addition, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls. If the special figure holding storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a large winning opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 shown in FIG. In this way, the special prize opening as the specific area is an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a player who cannot pass (enter) (or difficult to pass (enter)). Changes to a closed state that is disadvantageous to the user.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) through the big prize opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided on the right side of the second hold display 25B. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols (ordinary symbols and normal symbols) which are a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display of the normal symbol is also called a normal game (ordinary game). The usual game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, and thereby the passage of the game ball is detected. At the right side position of the normal symbol display 20, a universal symbol holding display 25C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. In other words, the general-purpose hold display unit 25C displays the number of general-purpose holds stored, which is the number of general-purpose games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lighting LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, a windmill and a number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, a game area side light emitting component is disposed on the game board 2. As this game area side light emitting component, for example, a light emitting component (LED) (not shown) provided in the center decorative frame 52, a light emitting component (LED not shown) provided in the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. )and so on. In addition, the game board 2 may include a light emitting component (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface (for example, a light guide region) to emit light. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and an effect LED 9 for game effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine is supplied to a hitting ball launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (also referred to as a hitting ball supply plate) that can be held (stored) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a discharge port (not shown) for discharging excess balls, foul balls, and the like slightly from the upper plate 90 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. A push button 31B is provided on a member forming the upper plate. A button sensor 36A that detects a player's operation (for example, pressing) on the push button 31B and outputs an operation detection signal to the effect control board 12 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is installed. Yes. Further, a cross button 46 is provided on a member forming the upper plate 90. In the main body of the upper plate 90 at the position where the cross button 46 is installed, a player's operation on the cross button 46 (for example, pressing up, down, left, right) is detected, and an operation detection signal is sent to the effect control board 12. Are provided with cross button sensors 38A to 38D.

  A stick controller 31 </ b> A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a lower portion of the gaming machine frame 3. A stick origin position sensor 35A for detecting that the operating rod is at the origin position and outputting a detection signal to the effect control board 12 and an operating rod are provided inside the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 below the stick controller 31A. There is provided a stick pulling position sensor 35B that detects that it is in the pulling position and outputs an operation detection signal to the effect control board 12. A vibration motor 35C capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A is provided inside the stick controller 31A.

  At the upper front of the gaming machine frame 3, a movable body that is rotatable between an origin position that hides the sky light-emitting portion 47 invisible to the player and an open position that opens the rendering portion so that the player can see it. The cover body 48 is provided and can be opened and closed by a cover body motor 39C provided inside. Also, inside the gaming machine frame 3, a cover body origin position sensor 39A that detects that the cover body 48 is at the origin position and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12, and the cover body 48 is in the open position. There is provided a cover body opening position sensor 39B that detects the presence and outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 12.

  In addition, on the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of effect LEDs 9 extends in a belt shape from the left and right sides of the ceiling light emitting unit 47 to the lower side along the left and right sides of the window 51. ing.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, the LED control board 14, and various kinds of signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are transmitted. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying control signals, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control. On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 that detect the game ball that has passed through the pass gate 41 are displayed on the main board 11. The transmission wiring is connected. Further, display control is performed on the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like. Wiring for transmitting a command signal is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a change pattern designation command indicating a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time of an effect symbol, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work area. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) for providing a game, CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and a random number circuit for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of CPU 103 104 and an I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. At this time, various data (data such as variation patterns and various determination tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program. The I / O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on after entering, and is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for game control.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit. The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces an effect display. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the production LED 9 are mounted.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. A display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120; , I / O 125 is mounted. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121, thereby realizing the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of the effect). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern and data such as various decision tables) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

  In addition, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game board 2 but also the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game frame, image data for displaying an image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

  The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), or the like.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (rendering random numbers) used for controlling the rendering operation in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program. The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound designated by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12. The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the lighting LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the lighting signal) based on the lighting signal from the lighting control board 12.

  The effect display device 5A includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5A via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. The effect display devices 5X and 5Y are configured in the same manner as the effect display device 5A with respect to the display configuration, although there are differences in size from the effect display device 5A and movement as described later.

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5A and the effect symbol display areas of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, the variation of the effect symbol corresponds to the start of the first or second special figure game. Display starts. When the variable display result (also referred to as a confirmed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first and second special figure games, the confirmed effect symbol (of the three effect symbols) that becomes the display result (variable display result) of the effect symbol variation display is displayed. Combination) is stopped (derived).

  In addition, the effect control board 12 includes a setting changeover switch 55 for effect settings such as volume and light quantity, the first drive mechanism 310, the second drive mechanism 320, the third drive mechanism 330, and the third drive mechanism 330 of the first movable body 300. 4 drive mechanism 340, 5th drive mechanism 410 of 2nd movable body 400, 6th drive mechanism 510L, 510R of 3rd movable body 500L, 500R, 7th drive mechanism 610L, 610R of 4th movable body 600L, 600R Board side electronic components provided on the board 2 side, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, vibration motor 35C, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button Sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body open position sensor 39B, And the frame-side electronic component provided on the game frame side such over drum motor 39C, are connected.

  Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1A will be described based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine frame 3 is supported by an outer frame 60 formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by an upper plate 61, a lower plate 62, a left side plate 63 and a right side plate 64. Specifically, the lower opening portion of the outer frame 60 is closed by a curtain plate 65, and the upper left and lower left corners of the outer frame 60 are provided in the upper and lower directions provided at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the gaming machine frame 3. A bearing portion (not shown) that rotatably supports a turning shaft (not shown) that faces the rim is provided, and the gaming machine frame 3 is centered around the left side of the outer frame 60. It is rotatably supported between a closed position for closing the opening and an open position for opening the opening.

  The gaming machine frame 3 is formed with a mounting portion 160 having an opening of a size that allows a back cover 70 covering various parts and devices provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 to be inserted. A locking recess (not shown) is provided at the left upper and lower positions, and a panel retainer (not shown) is provided at the right upper and lower positions. Therefore, the back cover 70 on the back of the gaming board 2 is inserted into the mounting portion 160 from the front of the gaming machine frame 3, and the right end portion of the gaming board 2 is inserted into the locking recess (not shown). The game board 2 can be mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 by being locked with a board holding metal fitting (not shown). Further, the game board 2 can be easily removed from the gaming machine frame 3 by releasing the locked state of the board holding metal fittings.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 6, various electronic devices such as sensors and motors provided in the gaming frame including the gaming machine frame 3 and the opening / closing frame 50 are provided below the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3. A frame-side connector WCN to which wiring from components is connected is provided, and a board-side connector BCN to which wiring from various electronic components such as sensors and motors provided on the gaming board 2 is connected to the lower part of the gaming board 2. And the frame-side connector WCN and the board-side connector BCN are connected by attaching the game board 2 to the mounting part 160 from the front. Thereby, the board-side electronic components among the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 by attaching the game board 2 to the attachment part 160 are connected to the effect control board 12, respectively. Of the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 by being removed, the connection between the electronic component on the panel side and the effect control board 12 is released.

  Next, another pachinko gaming machine 1B is shown in FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1A is manufactured as a dedicated frame that has a design frame and an accessory unique to a specific model in which the game frame including the opening and closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 is used only for the specific model. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the game frame composed of the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 has a predetermined design and an accessory, and is commonly used for a plurality of models. It is manufactured as a frame.

  As shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1B is configured in substantially the same manner as the pachinko gaming machine 1A with respect to the basic structure and circuit configuration of the gaming machine, and thus is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The detailed description will be omitted by giving the same reference numerals to the structural parts and electronic parts having functions.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 </ b> A and the pachinko gaming machine 1 </ b> B are respectively supported by an outer frame 60 so as to be rotatable and have a gaming machine frame 3 having an opening / closing frame 50, and a gaming machine frame 3. Although the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 are attached to the back side of the game board 2, the front design of the opening / closing frame 50 is different. .

  The game board 2 of each pachinko gaming machine 1A, 1B is formed with a game area 10 provided with an object unique to the model (for example, various winning holes etc.), and a movable body or decoration unique to the model. While the members and the like are provided, the outer shape and the like of the board surface plate are formed in substantially the same manner, so that the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B are provided. It can be mounted on any of the mounting portions 160. Further, the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN described above are also provided in the same manner in each pachinko gaming machine 1A, 1B.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game frames of the respective pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a hitting operation handle 30, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and a cross button 46. . Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a cover body 48 capable of opening and closing the sky light emitting unit 47. The hitting operation handle 30, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, and the like are operation means having the same function and used for the same purpose. However, as shown in FIG. Etc. are different.

  Specifically, the hitting operation handle 30 can be rotated for launching a game ball into the game area 10 by a launching device. The hitting operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is provided with a rocket 45 that is a movable body that can move between the origin position and the protruding position, but the hitting operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B has no rocket. Not provided.

  The stick controller 31A is movable between an origin position (non-operation position) and a pull position (operation position) closer to the origin position. The stick controller 31A detects the pull position by the stick origin position sensor 35A. In FIG. 5, the vibration is detected by the stick pulling position sensor 35B and is vibrated by the vibration motor 35C. On the other hand, the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A does not move up and down, but the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1B moves up and down by a stick motor 35D. Further, the design of the stick controller 31A differs between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

  The push button 31B is movable between an origin position (non-operation position) and an operation position (operation position) below the origin position, and is detected by the button sensor 36A at the operation position. Yes. Further, the design of the push button 31B is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

  The cross button 46 can be pressed down at the origin position (non-operation position) and any one of the front side, rear side, left side, and right side of the origin position, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D at each operation position. Is to be detected. In addition, the design of the cross button 46 is the same in the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

  The cover body 48 is rotatable between an origin position and an open position, and is detected by the cover body origin position sensor 39A at the origin position, detected by the cover body open position sensor 39B at the open position, and the cover body motor 39C. Thus, the cover body 48 can be rotated. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1B is not provided with the top light emitting portion 47 and the cover body 48 that can open and close the top light emitting portion 47.

  The dedicated frame (pachinko gaming machine 1A) does not have a stick motor that moves the stick controller 31A up and down, but the common frame (pachinko gaming machine 1B) has a stick motor 35D that moves the stick controller 31A up and down. . The dedicated frame (pachinko machine 1A) has a rocket motor 37C for operating the rocket 45 and a cover body motor 39C for operating the cover body 48 as a movable body for production. The frame does not have a rocket motor or a cover motor.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 </ b> B has a setting changeover switch 55 for effect settings such as volume and light quantity, the first drive mechanism 701 of the movable body 700, and the second drive. Board-side electronic components such as a mechanism 702 provided on the game board 2 side, and a game frame side such as a stick origin position sensor 35A, a stick pulling position sensor 35B, a vibration motor 35C, a stick motor 35D, a button sensor 36A, and cross button sensors 38A to 38D. Are connected to the frame-side electronic component provided on the frame.

  In addition, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 includes not only the operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game board 2 but also the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Operation control data for operating the movable body provided in the game frame, image data for displaying an image corresponding to the operation means provided in the game frame, and the like are stored.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, or the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is mounted on the gaming machine 1A. It can be mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the machine frame 3. That is, one game board 2 (for example, a predetermined type of game board 2) can be mounted on either a dedicated frame or a common frame. Further, by attaching the game board 2 to the mounting part 160, the frame side connector WCN and the board side connector BCN are connected, and among the electronic components controlled by the effect control board 12 provided in the game board 2, the game frame side The electronic components provided in are connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring.

  Thus, for example, at the stage of manufacturing development at a pachinko machine manufacturer or after delivery to a game store, the game board 2 manufactured to be mounted on a dedicated frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Even if the gaming board 2 manufactured to be mounted on the common frame is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the effect control board 12 and the electronic component on the gaming frame side are connected by wiring. And, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on with the game board 2 not corresponding to the game frame mounted, the operation mode of the movable body on the game frame side controlled by the CPU 120 for effect control is different. Even if the CPU 120 outputs an operation signal or the like to the movable body on the game frame side, the movable body may not operate or the movable body may malfunction, or an unsupported operation signal is output. There is a possibility that a problem may occur that an excessive load is applied to the motor or the like as a drive source and the image is burned.

  Further, as will be described later, when performing an effect urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, an image may be displayed on the effect display device 5 of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (see FIG. 18). When the game board 2 that does not correspond to the game frame is mounted, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the stick controller 31A or push button different from the stick controller 31A or push button 31B provided in the game frame to which the game board 2 is mounted. There is a possibility that the image of the button 31B is displayed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming board 2 is mounted on the mounting portion 160 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 detects from the various detection means provided in the gaming frame. Based on the specific information, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 on which the gaming board 2 is mounted is a specific gaming machine frame (for example, a dedicated frame or a common frame), and is a specific gaming machine frame. It is possible to notify when it is determined.

  Next, based on FIG. 8, the wiring connection status between various electronic components provided in the game frame including the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect control board 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which the game frame is a dedicated frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A, a stick pulling position sensor 35B, and a vibration motor 35C). , Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body opening position sensor 39B, cover body motor 39C) Is provided with a serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B that is a common frame, the effect control board 12 and various electronic components (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A, a stick pulling position sensor 35B, a vibration motor 35C, A serial conversion IC 130 for converting parallel data into serial data is provided between the stick motor 35D, the button sensor 36A, and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D).

  The serial conversion IC 130 shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B outputs serial data to the input port 131 to which detection signals (parallel data) from various electronic components are input, and to the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12. A serial communication unit 132, and each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131 to the input port 131 based on the input state of the detection signal 16-bit serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal is generated, and the generated serial data can be output from the serial communication unit 132 to the effect control board 12.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, the effect control board 12 is provided on the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the gaming machine frame 3, and is provided on the effect control board 12 and the game frame side. Since serial data communication is possible with the frame-side electronic components, the number of wires between the presentation control board 12 and each frame-side electronic component can be reduced compared to the case where communication is performed using parallel data. Yes.

  Although FIG. 8 shows a circuit configuration in which parallel data input from various electronic components in the game frame is converted into serial data by the serial conversion IC 130 and output to the effect control board 12, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is shown. , 1B have a parallel conversion IC (not shown) for converting various control information output as serial data from the production control board 12 into parallel data, which is not shown in detail in detail, and converted by the parallel conversion IC. Parallel data can be output to various electronic components (for example, a vibration motor 35C, a rocket motor 37C, a cover body motor 39C, and a stick motor 35D) of the game frame.

  Further, in FIG. 8, for convenience of explanation, detection signals from all electronic components provided on the game frame side are illustrated as being input to the input port 131 of one serial conversion IC 130, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention is not limited, and a plurality of serial conversion ICs 130 may be provided. The serial conversion IC 130 is preferably provided at a predetermined location of the game frame (for example, the back surface of the open / close frame 50).

  In the present embodiment, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the cross button 46, the rocket 45, and the cover body 28 are detected in the input port 131 when the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are powered on. A detection signal (a signal indicating an ON state) is output from the sensor. Then, the serial conversion IC 130 confirms the input state (on state, off state) of each signal of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a), see FIG. 9) of the input port 131 and sends it to the input port 131. 16-bit serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal is generated and output to the serial communication unit 133 of the effect control board 12 via the serial communication unit 132.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are powered on, the serial conversion IC 130 inputs the signal status of each port number (0 (H) to 7 (a)) of the input port 131. The serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 by confirming and generating the serial data is output to the presentation control board 12, but the present invention is not limited to this, When the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the serial conversion IC 130, and the input capture signal (latch signal) is input. The serial conversion IC 130 generates serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and outputs the serial data to the effect control board 12. Good.

  In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B is turned on, drive signals from the vibration motor 35C, rocket motor 37C, cover body motor 39C, and stick motor 35D are input to the input port 131. Rather, a motor drive signal is output from the effect control CPU 120, and each motor is driven based on the drive signal, whereby the drive signal is input to the input port 131.

  In the present embodiment, the drive signal is input to the input port 131 by driving each motor based on the output of the motor drive signal from the effect control CPU 120. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a detection unit capable of detecting a motor may be provided, and a detection signal from the detection unit may be input when the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which the game frame is a dedicated frame, the detection signals from the various electronic components of the game frame are the port numbers 0 (H) to 7 (A ), 0 (h) to 7 (a), and as shown in FIG. 9B, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B that is a common frame, detection signals from various electronic components of the game frame are input ports 131. Port numbers 0 (H) to 7 (A) and 0 (h) to 7 (a).

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the button sensor 35 is connected to the port number 3 (E) in both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B, and the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pulling position sensor 35B are The pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B are connected to the port numbers 7 (A) and 0 (h), and the cross button sensors 38A to 38D are connected to the port numbers 4 (d) to 7 (a) for both the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B. It is connected.

  On the other hand, the vibration motor 35C is connected to port number 2 (F) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A and port number 0 (H) in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. That is, the port number to which the detection signal from the vibration motor 35C is input is different between the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B. The rocket origin position sensor 37A, the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, and the rocket motor 37C are connected to port numbers 4 (D) to 6 (B) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the port number 4 (D) to 6 (B) are not connected. The cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body opening position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C are connected to port numbers 1 (g) to 3 (e) in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1B. It is not connected to port numbers 1 (g) to 3 (e).

  As described above, the detection signals input to the input port 131 of the serial conversion IC 130 are the button sensor 35, the stick origin position sensor 35A and the stick pull position sensor 35B, and the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B for the cross button sensors 38A to 38D. Although it is input to a common port number, the vibration motor 35C is input to a different port number for the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the pachinko gaming machine 1B, and the rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protruding position sensor 37B, rocket motor 37C, the cover body origin position sensor 39A, the cover body opening position sensor 39B, and the cover body motor 39C, a detection signal is input to a specific port number of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, but a specific port number of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. Is not entered.

  That is, the effect control CPU 120 has different port numbers of the input port 131 to which the detection signal is input in the dedicated frame and the common frame, even if the detection target is the same detection means or the drive source having the same function and application. The detection signal is input to only one of the dedicated frame and the common frame for a specific port number, or the number of detection signal input ports is different between the dedicated frame and the common frame. The dedicated frame and the common frame are determined based on the determination items.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 indicates to which port number of the input port 131 the detection signal from each electronic component of the dedicated frame and the common frame is input. Identifiable data is stored. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the port number to which a detection signal from a specific electronic component among the various electronic components provided in the game frame is input in the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 when the power is turned on. The serial data to be identified is identified, and it is determined whether or not the identified serial data includes data indicating the input state of the detection signal, thereby determining whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame In addition, notification based on the determination result can be performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the production control CPU 120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. In the main process, first, a first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining an activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) The movable bodies (the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R / movable body 700) provided on the game board 2 side to the origin position The second initialization process (S51A) for returning and confirming the operation and the origin position of each movable body (the rocket 45, the cover body 28, the stick controller 31A of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, etc.) provided on the game frame side And a third initialization process (S51B) for confirming the operation. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first performs command analysis processing (S54). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 4) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received production control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, after performing the effect random number update process for updating the counter value for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number (S56), the sub-side error process (S57) is performed, After executing the sub-side notification process (S58), the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S51A) of the present embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies. In this embodiment, the first movable body 300 → the second movable body 400 → the third movable body 500L, 500R → the fourth movable body 600L, as the order. The order of 600R is preset. Therefore, when S101 is executed for the first time, the first movable body 300 is specified as the target movable body. Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target movable body that requires origin detection (S102).

  In the present embodiment, as the origin detection target movable body that needs to perform origin detection, only a movable body having an origin position detection sensor is applicable, and a movable body having no origin detection sensor is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is one of the movable bodies having the origin position detection sensor, it is determined as “Y” in the determination, while the movable body identified in S101 determines the origin position detection sensor. If the movable body does not have, it is determined as “N”.

  When it is determined “N” in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S102, the process proceeds to S103, the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the movable body to be operated is specified (S103), and whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

  If it is not at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting the non-detection operation count counter to 0 to count the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S105) As a control speed for operating the operation target movable body, the operation target is the same operation speed as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 13 and 14) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later. A minimum control speed for operating the movable body is set (S106). If the operation target movable body is the first movable body 300, for example, the first movable body drive motor 303 is set as the origin. For example, if the operation target movable body is the first movable body 300, the lever motor 36 starts to be driven in the origin position direction (S107), and the non-detection operation period time To start the timer count of Ma (S108). The non-detection operation period timer may be counted by, for example, counting the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized by the first initialization process. .

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state in which the origin detection sensor enters a detection state and monitors whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has reached a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

  By driving a drive device (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303) of the operation target movable body in the direction of the origin position, the operation target movable body is positioned at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. If this happens, the drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112 is performed. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S113).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S113, the drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored (S114), and the process proceeds to S130. . That is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the operation control for actual operation confirmation described later is not executed for the operation target movable body ( The origin return error is stored in order to set the movable object to be moved to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation frequency counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the operation target movable body is illustrated as being in a dead end state. When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the initialization error process is started, and the initialization error process is executed, whereby 2 By interrupting the initialization process, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (such as the effect control CPU 120) may not be activated (dead end state). .

  When the operation target movable body is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, indicating that the movable object is operated). It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating reception of a detection signal (such as a production button) or preventing the operation target movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation number counter has not reached the number of operation error determinations, the drive motor is stopped, the process returns to S106, and the processes of S106 to S108 are performed again to move the operation target. The operation of moving the body to the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) (non-detection operation control) is started, and the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above is entered. .

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (moving control at the time of non-detection) is performed to repeatedly move the movable object to be moved to the origin position (initial position) until the operation error determination count is reached. If the operation target movable body is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

  On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S104 and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the operation count counter at detection, and then the operation process data at detection is set (S121a). The timer count is started (S121b). As the timer count of the detection process timer, the signal output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting the number or the like. Further, in the detection operation process data of the present embodiment, as a control speed for operating the movable object to be operated, a minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) described later (FIG. 13, FIG. 14)), the minimum control speed for operating the movable object to be operated is described (set).

  Next, the operation target movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection-time operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123). If not completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation target movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

  In this way, in the detection operation control, until the detection operation process data is completed, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initial At the lowest speed in the control operation), an operation of once leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning from the position away from the origin position (initial position) to the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 13). The position away from the origin position is a position in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, a position where the detected part of each movable body cannot be detected by each origin sensor, and is a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. Hour operating position).

  When it is determined in S123 that the set operation process data at the time of detection is completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124, and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in a detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the operation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the operation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the operation count counter during detection (S126). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection-time operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of operation error determinations, the process proceeds to S128, the origin return error of the movable object to be operated is stored (S128), and the process proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation target movable body (the operation concerned) The origin return error is stored in order to set the target movable body to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In the present embodiment, the mode in which the operation target movable body is set to the dead end state when the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of operation error determinations in S127 is exemplified. Without being limited thereto, when the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S113, the initialization error process is started, and the initialization error process is executed, whereby the second initial The production control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52 and the production control board 12 may be in a state where it does not start (dead end state).

  Also, when the operation target movable body is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to input an input signal (for example, an effect button). It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal or the like, or preventing the operation target movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  In S130, which is executed when “N” is determined in S102, “Y” is determined in S109, or “Y” is determined in S124, the movable body is not yet an operation target. It is determined whether or not there is a remaining movable body. When there is no remaining movable body (specifically, when the operation target movable body is the third movable body 500), the actual movement shown in FIG. The processing shifts to processing for performing operation control for operation confirmation. On the other hand, if there are remaining movable bodies, the process proceeds to S131, the movable body to be operated next is specified, then the process returns to S102, and the above-described processing from S102 is performed on the identified movable object. Do the same.

  If S131 is executed when the operation target movable body is the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400 is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is the first movable body. When S131 is executed in the case of the two movable bodies 400, (operation lever 31) is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data, and the operation target movable body is (operation lever 31). When S131 is executed, the third movable body 500 is specified as the operation target movable body based on the setting data.

  Next, the processing shown in FIG. 12 will be described. First, in S200 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the operation based on the setting data (movable object to be checked) based on the setting data as in S101 described above. Is identified (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a storage of an origin return error of the target movable body (S201).

  If there is a storage of the origin return error of the movable body to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes from S202a to S213. In this way, in this embodiment, the operation control for actual operation confirmation is not performed for the movable body that is determined as the origin return error in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control.

  On the other hand, if there is no storage of the return-to-origin error of the movable body to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S202a, where process data for actual operation confirmation corresponding to the movable body to be confirmed is set. That is, if the confirmation target movable body is the first movable body 300, process data for actual operation confirmation of the first movable body 300 is set, and if the confirmation target movable body is the second movable body 400, the second movable body. 400 actual operation confirmation process data is set, and if the confirmation target movable body is (operation lever 31), the actual operation confirmation process data of (operation lever 31) is set, and the confirmation target movable body is the third movable body. If it is the body 500, the process data for actual operation confirmation of the third movable body 500 is set. In each actual operation check process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the operation actually performed in the movable body presentation in the production.

  Next, the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is started (S202b). Note that the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is a signal output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process, like the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting the number of

  Then, the movable object to be confirmed is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data (S203), and the process data is completed. (S204) If the process data is not completed, the process returns to S203, and the confirmation object movable body is set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer at that time. Operate based on the controlled speed.

  As described above, until the actual operation check process data is completed, the confirmation target movable body is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation check process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. By doing so, the control speed of the movable body to be confirmed can be sequentially changed in time series, and the same acceleration or deceleration as the control speed set when the movable body is actually operated in the movable body effect can be performed. it can.

  If it is determined in step S204 that the set process data for actual operation confirmation has been completed, the drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the confirmation target movable body is an origin detection target movable body. Is determined (S204a). If the confirmation target movable body is not the origin detection target movable body, that is, if it is the third movable body 500, the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the target object is the origin detection target movable body, that is, if it is the first movable body 300 or the second movable body 400, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, the operation target movable body. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not the body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

  When the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, when the confirmation target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the confirmation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position), the above-described non-detection operation control is performed (see FIG. 11). Steps S206 to S213 are performed in order to position the movable body to be confirmed at the origin position (initial position).

  Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation frequency counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation check operation control (long initialization operation control) is set as the control speed. The minimum control speed for operating the operation target movable body at the same operation speed as the minimum speed is set (S207), and the confirmation target movable body drive device, for example, if the confirmation target movable body is the first movable body 300, is set. The first movable body drive motor 303 is started to drive in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether the origin detection sensor is in a detection state and whether the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

  The confirmation target movable body is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the confirmation target movable body drive device (for example, the first movable body drive motor 303) in the direction of the origin position (initial position), and the origin detection sensor If it is in the detection state, “Y” is determined in S210, and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the confirmation target movable body is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S213).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S220. In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the operation target movable body is illustrated as being in a dead end state. When the value of the non-detection operation frequency counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target movable body is stored, and the operation target movable body is hereinafter May be configured not to execute the actual operation. Alternatively, by starting the initialization error process and executing the initialization error process, the second initialization process is interrupted, whereby the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 May not be activated (dead end state).

  Also, when the operation target movable body is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to input an input signal (for example, an effect button). It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal or the like, or preventing the operation target movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter has not reached the operation error determination number, the process returns to S207, and the processes of S207, S208, and S209 are performed again, and the movable object to be confirmed is confirmed as the actual operation. The operation to move to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (the operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the process proceeds to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation control) of moving the movable object to be repeatedly checked to the origin position (initial position) is performed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the confirmation target movable body is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S220.

  In S220 executed when “Y” is determined in S201, “N” is determined in S204a, “Y” is determined in S205, or “Y” is determined in S210. , It is determined whether or not there are any remaining movable bodies that have not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if there are no remaining movable bodies (specifically, In the case of three movable bodies 500), the error record stored in S114 and S128 is cleared (S222), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if there are remaining movable bodies, the process proceeds to S221. Then, after specifying the movable body whose operation is to be checked next, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing from S201 is similarly executed on the specified target object.

  Here, an operation mode and control contents of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a schematic explanatory diagram illustrating operation modes of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 14A is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection operation control, and FIG. 14C is the control speed in the non-detection operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

  13 and 14, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control), the detection operation control (short initialization operation control), and the actual operation confirmation operation in the movable body that is the origin detection target movable body. Only control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and description of a movable body that is not the origin detection target movable body will be omitted. In addition, the reciprocating operation distance (movement range) of the first movable body 300 and the reciprocating operation distance (movement range) such as the reciprocating operation distance (movement range) of the second movable body 400 are not the same. The description will be made using the same conceptual diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 13, each movable body is provided so as to be able to reciprocate between an origin position (retracted position, initial position) and an effect position (operable position), and from the origin position to the effect position. The forward movement or the return movement from the effect position to the origin position is an actual action that is actually performed in the aforementioned movable body effect or the like.

  When the second initialization process is executed, the production control CPU 120 detects that the detected part of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor, that is, the movable body has an origin for some reason (for example, when transported or installed on a game island) If the actuator has moved from its position, or if it cannot return to its original position during the previous operation (for example, when performing a production, the return to origin of the movable body could not be confirmed or operated due to motor step-out, failure, or catching) Corresponding to non-detection operation control in FIG. 13 (for example, when a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as disappearing occurs) or when moving from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine) If it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the production position (such as the position indicated by a black circle) . When the non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is at a position away from the origin position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable body in the direction of the origin position. In addition, when the second initialization process is executed, the production control CPU 120 executes an operation control at the time of detection when the detected part of each movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor.

  For example, in order to ensure that the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period between the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor and the operation of the movable body in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may return and stop at a position shifted further to the back than the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control during detection for returning the movable body to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detected part by the origin detection sensor. Since there is no need to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection-time operation position in the vicinity of the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation that the movable body actually performs in various effects.

  Next, the control speeds set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 14A, 14B, and 14C are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each movable body. The operating speed is different. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section and another movement section When the movement section is different (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same moving section, the movable body is actually operated. In some cases, the operating speed may be different from the control speed. In addition, even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, the actual operation speed of each movable body is not necessarily the same if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body. It will not be the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body When there is a difference, the actual operation speed of each movable body is not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (A), when executing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The confirmation target movable body is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after acceleration from the origin position, the vehicle is decelerated and stopped at the effect position, and after acceleration from the effect position is decelerated and stopped at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the production position. Let In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range between the minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. In order to control each movable body to operate at the internal speed, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed are used. Control is performed so that each movable body operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed).

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following description, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. To do.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the production position, the movable body can be surely secured by controlling so that it becomes the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation over a longer time than when stopping at the production position. The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor after the vehicle is decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B), when performing the motion control at the time of detection, the CPU 120 for effect control always confirms the actual operation in the period for moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period for moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation check). Control to always operate the movable body based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  In the case of motion control during detection, the moving distance of the movable body is shorter than that for motion control for actual motion check. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged due to impact when the movable body returns to the home position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Control to operate at the lowest speed in operation control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14C, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the example, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control is obtained. Take control.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, when the movable body returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Since there is a possibility that the movable body or the like may be damaged due to an impact, control is performed so as to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the effect control CPU 120 has the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. Based on this, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operation speed. These minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each movable body, and are not the operation speeds common to each movable body. Therefore, the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

  Specifically, the operation lever 31 of the first movable part 302 of the first movable body 300 and the second movable parts 401 and 402 of the second movable body 400 has a size, a weight, and an operation as shown in FIG. Since the driving mechanism including the mode, the operating distance, and the driving motor is different, the actual operating speed of the movable body is different even when the same control speed is set. Even when different control speeds are set for the respective movable bodies, the actual operation speed of the movable bodies is different. Thus, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable body, and a plurality of movable bodies having different modes are controlled in order to perform control so that the movable body operates at the minimum speed. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the third initialization process (S51B) of the present embodiment. In the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), and 2 (f) of the input port 131 from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130. Serial data, that is, port number 4 (D) to which the detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45 not mounted on the common frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is input, the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B Is input, port number 5 (C) is input, detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and detection signal is input from the cover body opening position sensor 39B. The serial data of port number 2 (f) is specified (S61).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the specified serial data (S62), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4 (D)) ) And the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7 (A)), the rocket motor 37C is driven by driving the rocket motor 37C because there is a high possibility that it is a dedicated frame. 45 (return operation to the origin position) is performed and the serial data of port number 6 (B) is specified (S63), then the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). To the serial number of the port number 3 (e) is specified (S64).

  Then, it is determined whether or not both of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S65), and both of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are determined. If it is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, a dedicated frame flag indicating that the game frame is a dedicated frame is set on the assumption that the rocket motor 37C and the cover motor 39C that are not in the common frame are mounted ( In S66, notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is a dedicated frame is started (S67), and the process is terminated.

  If both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are not data indicating the drive signal input state in S65, one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) indicates the drive signal input state. It is determined whether or not the data is data (S68), and if one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, an operation error has occurred in the other movable body. Since there is a possibility that error information about the movable body corresponding to the non-input state data of the drive signal is stored (S69), the process proceeds to S66. That is, when one of the data indicates the input state of the drive signal, it is highly likely that only an operation error has occurred in the other movable body, and therefore it is determined that the frame is a dedicated frame.

  In S68, when one of the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, both the port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are the input state of the drive signal. Is not the data indicating that the rocket motor 37C or the cover body motor 39C may be a common frame, the vibration motor 35C is driven and the port numbers 2 (F) and 0 (H) are set. Serial data is specified (S70).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S71). If the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, Since there is a high possibility that the frame is a dedicated frame, the process proceeds to S69. On the other hand, when the port number 2 (F) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, that is, when the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, there is a possibility that it is a common frame. Since it is impossible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, the process proceeds to S72. That is, when the input state of the detection signal from the operating means is confirmed, it is determined that the frame is likely to be a dedicated frame, but when the input state of the drive signal from the movable body is confirmed, it may be a common frame. As a result of the determination, it is impossible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and it is determined that there is a high possibility that some abnormality has occurred.

  If there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S62, the vibration motor 35C is driven to identify the serial data of port number 0 (H) (S80). Then, it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S81). If the port number 0 (H) is the data indicating the input state of the drive signal, it is common. Assuming that there is a high possibility of being a frame, the stick motor 35D is driven to initialize the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position), and the serial data of port number 1 (G) is specified (S82). Then, it is determined whether or not port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S83). If port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the process proceeds to S85. If the port number 1 (G) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal, the error information of the stick controller 31A corresponding to the non-input state data of the drive signal is stored (S84), and the process proceeds to S85. And the common frame flag which shows that it is the pachinko machine 1B which is a common frame is set (S85), Notification B (refer FIG. 16 (B)) which shows that it is a common frame is started (S86), processing Exit.

  Thus, before confirming the input state of the drive signal of port number 1 (G), initialization of the stick controller 31A (return operation to the origin position) is performed, even though the stick controller 31A is present. The stick controller 31A has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason, so that the port number 1 (G) does not become data indicating the input state of the drive signal, so it is determined that it is not a common frame. Can be avoided.

  If the port number 0 (H) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S81, there is a possibility of a dedicated frame, so whether or not the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal. If the port number 2 (F) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, there is a high possibility that it is a dedicated frame, so the process proceeds to S63, where the port number 2 (F) is the drive signal. If it is not data indicating the input state, it is difficult to specify whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, and the process proceeds to S72.

  If the port number 2 (F) is not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S71 or S87, it is impossible to specify whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame (or difficult to specify). A common frame flag indicating the gaming machine 1B is set (S72), a notification C (see FIG. 16C) indicating the common frame is started (S73), and the process is terminated.

  In S72, it is impossible to specify whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame. However, by setting a common frame flag indicating that the frame is more versatile than the dedicated frame, it is for effect control. The CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the subsequent control can be performed on the assumption that it is a common frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated frame flag indicating a dedicated frame is set. It may be set, or a separate flag indicating that it cannot be specified may be set.

  In addition, when the error state of the movable body is stored in S69 and S84, the error state is not erased unless the RAM is cleared, so that the movable body stored as the error state when proceeding to the subsequent processing. Since it is possible not to perform the operation control (the operation target movable body is in a dead end state), the operation control of the movable body that may have a problem may be performed to drive a motor or other drive source. It can suppress applying a load.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes various notifications A to C started in S67, S73, and S86 in S58 in the effect control main process. Specifically, the notification A and the notification B end at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of notification, and the notification C has a predetermined release condition (for example, a power-off state). (E.g., RAM clear execution) is established.

  Next, notification modes of various notifications executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the gaming machine frame 3 is a dedicated frame, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), “the gaming machine frame is a“ dedicated frame ”on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The notification A for displaying the image G <b> 1 is executed. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the gaming machine frame 3 is a common frame, as shown in FIG. 16B, the “game machine frame“ common frame ”is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The notification B for displaying the image G2 “is” is executed. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is impossible to specify whether the gaming machine frame 3 is a dedicated frame or a common frame, the display of the effect display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. The screen C displays an image G3 "Check the combination of board frame and gaming board or the operating status of the movable body" on the screen. Execute.

  In this way, the notification of whether the gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame pachinko gaming machine 1A and the common frame pachinko gaming machine 1B, respectively. By using the effect display device 5 (5A), the player can be notified of whether the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame, or cannot be specified. Can do. Further, as in the notification C, notification may be performed using other notification means such as the effect LED 9 and the sky light emitting unit 47 other than the effect display device 5.

  Further, when the operation error of the movable body is stored in S114, S128, S214 in the second initialization process of S51A, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display screen of the effect display device 5 as shown in FIG. In addition, the image G4 “vibration motor error” may be displayed, and the notification D for lighting the effect LEDs 9 on the left and right of the display screen in a predetermined manner may be executed.

  In addition, when error information of the movable body corresponding to the non-input state data is stored in S69 and S84 in the third initialization process of S51B, that is, there is a possibility that an operation error of the movable body on the game frame side has occurred. In some cases, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image G5 “frame movable body error” on the display screen of the effect display device 5 as shown in FIG. Notification E for lighting the LED 9 in a predetermined manner may be executed. Also, in the case of an operation error of the stick controller, an image G6 “stick controller error” is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the sky light emitting unit 47 having only a common frame above the display screen is lit in a predetermined manner. Notification E may be executed.

  Moreover, in FIG. 16, although the form which described display apparatuses, such as the effect display apparatus 5, and light-emitting bodies, such as LED 9 for effects, and the top light emission part 47, was illustrated as an example of alerting | reporting means, this invention is limited to this. For example, speakers 8L and 8R that can output sound may be applied as the notification means.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the hold memory display in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U of the effect display device 5 in accordance with the stored contents of the hold memory buffer. A hold display update process for updating to display is executed (S172).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S173 to S179 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173): It is confirmed whether a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 or not. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis process. If the change pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S174).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S174): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S175).

  Production symbol variation processing (S175): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S176).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (S176): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, the control for deriving and displaying the variation of the production symbol and displaying the display result (stop symbol) is performed. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S177) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173).

  Big hit display process (S177): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S178).

  Big hit game processing (S178): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S179).

  Big hit end effect processing (S179): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S173).

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 has predetermined timing (for example, movable object effect) in the effect symbol changing process (S175), the jackpot display process (S177), the jackpot game process (S178), the jackpot game process (S178), and the like. At the time when the execution condition is satisfied), the movable body effect of moving the movable body between the origin position and the effect position can be executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B as the embodiments of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism) and the game frame (second mechanism) in which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are provided. The game board 2 has an effect control CPU 120 as a control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and includes a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a dedicated frame) (for example, a dedicated frame). The game frame is detachable from the dedicated frame and the common frame), and the game frame includes an operation unit mounted on the game frame and a detection unit capable of detecting the state (position) of the movable body (for example, the stick origin position sensor 35A, the stick Pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body opening position sensor 39B, etc.) The serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12. Based on the detection specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130) output from the game frame, it is determined whether or not the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). When it is determined that the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), notification is performed.

  By doing in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by attaching the game board 2 for common frames to an exclusive frame can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by mounting the dedicated board game board 2 on the common frame.

  Specifically, by attaching the game board 2 to the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 provided in the game board 2 inputs a detection signal to the input port 131 by serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By checking the state, not only is it determined whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame, but also the determination result is notified by the effect display device 5, so whether the game board 2 and the game frame match. The operator can easily recognize this. Therefore, when the game board 2 and the game frame do not coincide with each other and the game is performed with the power turned on, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable body mounted in the mounted game frame is the movable body. Are driven based on the operation control data of different movable bodies, which causes problems such as the motor being the drive source of the movable bodies being overloaded and burned out, or the movable body parts being damaged. This can be prevented.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A includes a frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided with a window (for example, the window 51) through which a game area can be visually recognized, and a movable body, as will be described with reference to FIG. (E.g., the first movable body 300), and the window is provided on the game area side of the first transmission member (e.g., the first transmission body 250) and the first transmission member, A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260) in which a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed, and between the first transmission member and the second transmission member At least a part of the movable body can enter the formed space (for example, the space S) through the hole or the notch. Therefore, when the game board 2 having the first movable body 300 is mounted on the common frame, the window 51 of the common frame has a hole or a notch into which the first movable body 300 can enter. Therefore, when the first movable body 300 is operated, the first movable body 300 may collide with the window portion 51 and may be damaged. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by mounting 2 on the common frame.

  Further, in this embodiment, the type of the game frame in which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled by the control means (effect control CPU 120) provided in the game board 2 and the effect control CPU 120 mounted on a plurality of types of game frames. For example, identification information capable of identifying each of a plurality of types of game frames is provided on the game board 2 because the operation means and the plurality of detection means capable of detecting the movable body can be specified. The control means can easily perform the determination without taking the trouble of reading the identification information.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 specifies serial data of a specific port number in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B, and detects a detection signal in the specified serial data. It is determined whether there is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether there is data indicating the input state.

  By doing in this way, it can be judged suitably whether it is a special frame (or common frame). For example, a specific port number (for example, 4 (for example, 4 ()) is detected among a plurality of port numbers to which detection signals from a plurality of origin position sensors that can detect that a movable body mounted only on a dedicated frame is at the origin position. D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f)) are specified, and a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined depending on whether there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the specified serial data. It can be suitably determined whether or not it is a dedicated frame (or common frame).

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 specifies serial data of a plurality of specific port numbers in S61 to S65, S68 to S71, S80 to S83, and S87 of the third initialization process of S51B, and uses the specified serial data as the specified serial data. Whether there is a dedicated frame or a common frame is determined by whether there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal.

  By doing in this way, it can be judged suitably whether it is a special frame (or common frame). For example, a plurality of port numbers (for example, 4 (D), 5 (C) to which detection signals from a plurality of origin position sensors that can detect that a movable body mounted only on a dedicated frame is at the origin position are input. ) 1 (g), 2 (f)) is specified, and it is determined whether the specified serial data is a dedicated frame or a common frame depending on whether there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal. By doing so, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the frame is a dedicated frame (or a common frame) than when determining based on the serial data of one port number.

  The game frame includes operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and the serial conversion IC 130 detects a detection signal from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to the input port 131. Can be generated and output to the effect control board 12.

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of operation abnormality. In addition, the operation means that can be operated by the player is likely to be installed in many models regardless of the dedicated frame or common frame, and the design, operation mode, etc. may be changed in various game frames. Therefore, if the input state of the detection signal from the operation means is used, it is easy to specify the type of game frame.

  The game frame includes an operable movable body (for example, a dedicated frame rocket 45, a cover body 48, a stick controller 31A, etc.), and the serial conversion IC 130 includes a vibration motor 35C to the input port 131, a rocket motor 37C, It is possible to generate serial data that can specify the input state of the drive signals from the cover body motor 39C and the stick motor 35D and output it to the effect control board 12.

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of abnormal operation. In addition, the movable body is likely to be mounted on many models regardless of the dedicated frame or the common frame, and the design, operation mode, etc. are likely to be changed in various game frames. If the input state of the drive signal from the movable body is used, it becomes easy to specify the type of game frame.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs notification using notification means (for example, the effect display devices 5 and 5A, the effect LED 9 and the like) provided in common for a plurality of types of game frames.

  In this way, any type of game frame can be appropriately notified. That is, even when the game board 2 is attached to a common frame that is not a dedicated frame, it is possible to notify that the game board 2 and the game frame do not coincide with each other.

  In addition, the game can be executed even if the effect control CPU 120 is informing, and the use of the detection target object that is the object of notification is restricted. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 can play a game while the movable body in which the error information is stored in the third initialization process of S51B is in a dead-end state.

  By doing in this way, generation | occurrence | production of abnormality can be prevented. Specifically, since the production control CPU 120 can avoid performing control based on inappropriate control data, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of a problem.

  The pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B according to the embodiments of the present invention include a game board 2 (first mechanism) and a game frame (second mechanism) in which the game board 2 can be attached and detached. The game board 2 includes an effect control CPU 120 as control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and includes a plurality of types of game frames (for example, a dedicated frame and a special game frame). The game frame can be attached to and detached from the common frame), and the game frame includes detection means (for example, a stick origin position sensor 35A and a stick pull position sensor 35B) that can detect the state (position) of the operation means and the movable body mounted on the game frame. Button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A-38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body opening position sensor 39B, etc.) The provided serial conversion IC 130 can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 outputs the serial data from the game frame. Based on the detected specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130), it is possible to determine whether or not the game frame in which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame). .

  By doing in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by attaching the game board 2 for common frames to an exclusive frame can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by mounting the dedicated board game board 2 on the common frame.

  Specifically, by attaching the game board 2 to the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 provided in the game board 2 inputs a detection signal to the input port 131 by serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. By checking the state, it is determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame. Therefore, when the game board 2 and the game frame do not coincide with each other and the game is performed with the power turned on, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable body mounted in the mounted game frame is the movable body. Are driven based on the operation control data of different movable bodies, which causes problems such as the motor being the drive source of the movable bodies being overloaded and burned out, or the movable body parts being damaged. This can be prevented.

  In the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization operation control of the movable body in S63 and S64 in the third initialization process of S51B, so that the drive signal from the motor that drives the movable body is obtained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection status of each detection means changes depending on the execution of the initialization operation control. In the initialization operation control, the type of game frame may be specified by specifying serial data of a port number to which a detection signal from the origin position detection sensor of the movable body is input.

  By doing so, an accurate determination can be made. Specifically, before confirming the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor of the movable body, the rocket 45 and the cover body are initialized by executing initialization of the rocket 45 and the cover body 28 (return operation to the origin position). Even though there are 28, the movable body has moved to a position deviated from the origin position for some reason, so that it does not become data indicating the input state of the detection signal, so it is determined that it is not a dedicated frame. Can be avoided.

  Note that the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, and cross button 46, which are operation means, are always located at the origin position by an urging means (not shown), and therefore, in this embodiment, initialization processing is executed. Although the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor is confirmed without doing so, the input state of the detection signal may be confirmed after executing the initialization process. Further, the movable body may be specified by confirming the input state of the detection signal from the origin position sensor without executing the initialization process.

  Moreover, in the said Example, after determining the classification of the game frame with which the game board 2 was mounted | worn in the 3rd initialization process of S51B, the form which notifies this determination result was illustrated, but this invention is limited to this. However, after determining the type of the game frame in which the game board 2 is mounted, it is not always necessary to notify the determination result. In such a case, there is a possibility that the game will be performed while the game board 2 is mounted on the non-regular game frame. However, the effect control CPU 120 determines the error state of the movable body in the third initialization process of S51B. Since it is memorized, the movable body does not operate, but it can be avoided to operate under a load.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the game board 2 with the special frame is attached to the common frame or when the game board 2 with the common frame is attached to the special frame, that is, the game board 2 is attached to the non-regular game frame. Even in this case, when the type of the mounted game frame can be specified, the type of the specified game frame is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is not When it is attached to a regular game frame or a regular game frame, it is notified that the game board 2 and the game frame are inconsistent or coincidence without notifying the type of the game frame in an identifiable manner. Also good. Furthermore, error notification may be performed only when it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame are inconsistent, and notification may not be performed when it is determined that they match. Alternatively, when the game board 2 is attached to an unauthorized game frame, it may be impossible to play a game.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which alert | reports that it cannot specify when the kind of game frame which mounted | worn the game board 2 cannot be specified was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. If it is impossible to specify, the fact that the game board 2 and the game frame are inconsistent may be notified in an identifiable manner, or error notification may be performed.

  In the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of determining whether the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is the dedicated frame or the common frame in the third initialization process of S51B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is determined whether the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame. That is, it may be determined whether or not it is a specific game frame (for example, a dedicated frame or a dedicated frame).

  Moreover, although the said Example illustrated the form which performs the process which determines whether the kind of game frame with which the game board 2 was mounted | worn in the 3rd initialization process of S51B is a special frame or a common frame, The invention is not limited to this, the process of initializing the movable body of the game frame (control to return to the original position), and the type of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is either a dedicated frame or a common frame. It is also possible to separate and perform the process of determining whether or not. In other words, if processing for specifying whether the type of the gaming frame on which the gaming board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame or a common frame is performed, a game based on the determination result notification or the determination result It is only necessary to control the electronic components on the frame side.

  In the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines a specific port number, that is, a dedicated frame and a common frame, from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side in the third initialization process of S51B. The serial data of possible port numbers is specified, and the mode of determining whether or not it is a dedicated frame depending on whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the specified data has been exemplified. For example, it may be determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the input time of a specific signal output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side.

  For example, when a movable body mounted on a dedicated frame and a movable body mounted on a common frame are returned to the origin position by initialization operation control, the movable body is detected by the origin position detection sensor. If the time to stop the movable body is different, it is possible to determine whether it is a dedicated frame or a common frame based on the difference in the time when the signal from the origin position detection sensor is input. Even when the number of signals input to the port and the input bit (port number) are the same, it can be determined whether the frame is a dedicated frame or a common frame.

  In the embodiment, the third initialization process of S51B for specifying the type of the game frame in which the game board 2 is mounted is controlled to return the movable body provided on the game board 2 side to the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third initialization process may be executed before the second initialization process. The third initialization process and the second initialization process may be performed together in one initialization process.

  Further, when the third initialization process is executed before the second initialization process, it is determined that the game board 2 and the game frame do not coincide with each other in the third initialization process. When it is determined that the type of the game cannot be specified, the process after the second initialization process may not be executed. By doing so, the game board 2 and the game frame are not matched. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to the above.

  Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 18A to 18C are diagrams illustrating examples of display modes in the dedicated frame, and FIGS. 18D to 18F are diagrams illustrating examples of display modes in the common frame.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 can perform an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, for example, at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display or a big hit gaming state. As an operation promotion effect, it is possible to display an image that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

  Specifically, in the case of the dedicated frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18A, an image G10 “Push!”, An image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the dedicated frame, In the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 18B, an image G12 “Closed!” And an image G13 corresponding to the stick controller 31A of the dedicated frame are displayed. .

  On the other hand, in the case of the common frame, in the operation promotion effect of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 18D, the image G10 is “push!” And the image G11 corresponding to the push button 31B of the common frame. G21 is displayed, and in the operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 18E, an image G12 “Closed!” And an image corresponding to the common frame stick controller 31A are displayed. An image G23 different from the existing image G13 is displayed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may display an image that prompts ball removal at a timing when ball removal is necessary, for example, during a big hit game. Specifically, in the case of a dedicated frame that does not have a lower pan, as shown in FIG. 18C, an image G14 “Pull out the sphere” is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (F), an image G24 different from the image G14 is displayed, such as “The lower plate is full.

  In the embodiment, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided in the game board 2 attached to the dedicated frame stores operation control data and image data corresponding to the dedicated frame, and the game board 2 attached to the common frame. Since the operation control data and image data corresponding to the common frame are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 provided in the game board 2, the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame, or the common frame is supported. When the game board 2 is attached to a dedicated frame, that is, when the game board 2 is attached to an irregular (non-corresponding) game frame, the motion control of the movable body is executed based on the non-corresponding motion control data, The image of the operation means is displayed based on the incompatible image data.

  Here, when the single gaming board 2 can be used by being mounted on both the gaming machine frame 3 as a dedicated frame and the gaming machine frame 3 as a common frame, the effect control board 12 can be used. In the ROM 121, the motion control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the common frame and the motion control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the common frame, that is, the motion control data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of game frames, Image data is stored in advance, and the motion control data and image data of the movable body corresponding to the set flag are stored depending on whether the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B. By making it possible to perform operation control and display control based on this, it is possible to perform control corresponding to the movable body and the operating means of the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted.

  In this way, when the game board 2 is attached to the dedicated frame, for example, display control or movable body as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18C based on the control data corresponding to the dedicated frame. When the game board 2 is mounted on the common frame, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18D to 18F, based on the control data corresponding to the common frame. Since display control and movable body motion control can be performed, motion control is performed without applying load to electronic components such as motors, and control that displays images that do not give the player a sense of incongruity is performed. It becomes possible to do.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A and 1B according to the embodiments of the present invention, the game board 2 (first mechanism) and the game frame (second mechanism) in which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are provided. The game board 2 includes an effect control CPU 120 as a control means capable of controlling the game board 2 and the game frame, and includes a plurality of types of game frames (for example, dedicated frames) including specific game frames (for example, dedicated frames). The game frame can be attached to and detached from the game frame, and the game frame can be detected by means of operation means mounted on the game frame or detection means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pulling position). Sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover body opening position sensor 39B, etc.) The serial conversion IC 130 provided in the technique frame can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output the serial data to the effect control board 12. Based on the detection specific information (serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130) output from the frame, it is determined whether or not the game frame on which the game board 2 is mounted is a dedicated frame (or a common frame), An effect (for example, an operation promotion effect or a ball removal error effect shown in FIG. 18) can be performed based on the determination result.

  By doing in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction by attaching the game board 2 for common frames to an exclusive frame can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by mounting the dedicated board game board 2 on the common frame.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs effects in a manner according to the state of each of the plurality of types of second mechanisms based on the determination result. For example, when the dedicated frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the dedicated frame at each effect timing is performed (see FIGS. 18A to 18C), and S51B. When the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the common frame is performed at each effect timing (see FIGS. 18D to 18F).

  By doing in this way, an appropriate production according to the type of game frame can be performed.

  In addition, the plurality of types of game frames include a common frame having an operable movable body (for example, a common frame stick controller 31A), and the effect control CPU 120, for example, in FIG. When performing an operation promotion effect of the stick controller 31A as shown, an effect of raising the stick controller 31A to the raised position may be executable.

  By doing in this way, an appropriate production according to the type of game frame can be performed.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect according to the type of the game frame (for example, in the effect symbol changing process or the big hit game process) based on the result of specifying the type of the game frame in the third initialization process of S51B. , See FIG. 18).

  By doing in this way, an appropriate production according to the type of game frame can be performed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a dedicated frame when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and for example, at a predetermined effect timing such as during a symbol variation display or a big hit gaming state. It is possible to produce effects in a manner corresponding to the determination result. For example, when the dedicated frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the dedicated frame at each effect timing (FIG. 18A to ( C)), when the common frame flag is set in the third initialization process of S51B, an effect of displaying an image corresponding to the common frame at each effect timing is performed (see FIGS. 18D to 18F). ).

  By doing in this way, a suitable effect can be performed according to the kind of game frame.

  Next, a second modification of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a third initialization process in the second modification of the present invention.

  In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 performs motion control and display control based on motion control data and image data corresponding to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B. Although the embodiment has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting changeover switch 55 connected to the effect control board 12 is given either control corresponding to the dedicated frame or control corresponding to the common frame. A function that allows a store clerk or the like of the game hall to perform switching operation may be added, and the effect control CPU 120 may perform control according to the contents set by the setting switch 55.

  Here, an example of the third initialization process in the case where the production control CPU 120 can perform control according to the content set by the setting changeover switch 55 will be described based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the third initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting content by the setting changeover switch 55 is set to a dedicated frame (S301). In the case of the dedicated frame, from the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130, serial data of port numbers 4 (D), 5 (C), 1 (g), 2 (f) at the input port 131, that is, non- The detection signal from the rocket origin position sensor 37A of the rocket 45 that is not mounted on the common frame of the regular pachinko gaming machine 1B is input, and the detection signal from the rocket protrusion position sensor 37B is input. Port number 5 (C), port number 1 (g) to which the detection signal from the cover body origin position sensor 39A of the cover body 28 is input, and port number 2 to which the detection signal from the cover body opening position sensor 39B is input. The serial data of (f) is specified (S302).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal in the specified serial data (S303), and data indicating the input state of the detection signal (for example, rocket origin position sensor 37A (port number 4 (D)) ) And the cover body origin position sensor 39A (data indicating the input state of the detection signal from the port number 7 (A)), the rocket motor 37C is driven by driving the rocket motor 37C because there is a high possibility that it is a dedicated frame. 45 (return operation to the origin position) is performed and the serial data of port number 6 (B) is specified (S304), then the cover body motor 39C is driven to initialize the cover body 28 (origin position). To the serial number of port number 3 (e) is specified (S305).

  Then, it is determined whether both port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S306), and both port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are determined. If it is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, a dedicated frame flag indicating that the game frame is a dedicated frame is set on the assumption that the rocket motor 37C and the cover motor 39C that are not in the common frame are mounted ( In step S307, notification A (see FIG. 16A) indicating that the frame is a dedicated frame is started (S308), and the process ends.

  In S301, if the setting content by the setting changeover switch 55 is not set to the dedicated frame, that is, if it is set to the common frame, the serial data of the port numbers 3 (E) and 7 (A) is specified (S310). Next, it is determined whether there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S311). If there is data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the vibration motor 35C is driven. After the serial data of the input port number 0 (H) is specified (S312), it is determined whether or not the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the detection signal (S313).

  When the port number 0 (H) is data indicating the input state of the detection signal, the stick motor 335C is driven to execute initialization of the stick controller 31A (return operation to the home position), and port number 1 (G ) Is specified (S314), and it is determined whether or not the port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal (S315). When port number 1 (G) is data indicating the input state of the drive signal, since there is a stick motor 35D mounted only on the common frame, a common frame flag indicating that it is a common frame is set. (S316) Notification B (see FIG. 16B) indicating that it is a common frame is started (S317), and the process is terminated.

  If there is no serial data in S303, if both port numbers 6 (B) and 3 (e) are not data indicating the input state of the drive signal in S306, or if there is no data indicating the input state of the detection signal in S311 In S313, if the port number 0 (H) is not data indicating the signal input state, or if the port number 1 (G) is not data indicating the drive signal input state in S315, it is a dedicated frame. Since it is impossible to specify whether it is a common frame or not, a common frame flag indicating that it is a pachinko gaming machine 1B that is a common frame is set (S318), and a notification C indicating that it is a common frame (FIG. 16 (C )) Is started (S319), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, the game board 2 (first mechanism) and the game frame (second mechanism) to which the game board 2 can be attached and detached are provided, and the game board 2 can control the game board 2 and the game frame. Production control CPU 120 as control means, and setting means (for example, setting changeover switch 55) capable of setting either the regular game frame type of the game board 2 or the non-regular game frame type of the game board 2 ), And can be attached to and detached from a game frame (for example, a dedicated frame and a common frame), and the game frame can be detected to detect a state (position) of an operation means or a movable body mounted on the game frame. Means (for example, stick origin position sensor 35A, stick pull position sensor 35B, button sensor 36A, rocket origin position sensor 37A, rocket protrusion position sensor 37B, cross button sensors 38A to 38D, cover body origin position sensor 39A, cover The serial conversion IC 130 provided in the game frame with the body opening position sensor 39B or the like) can generate serial data that can specify the input state of the detection signal to the input port 131 and output it to the effect control board 12 The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game board 2 matches the type of game frame set by the setting changeover switch 55 based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130. .

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the gaming board 2 being mounted in an unauthorized gaming frame. Specifically, when the game board 2 is attached to the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 sets the game board 2 with the setting changeover switch 55 based on the serial data output from the serial conversion IC 130 on the game frame side. Even if there are many types of game frames, the game board 2 and the game frames match to determine whether or not they match the types of game frames that are present, that is, whether or not they are attached to regular game frames. It can be easily determined whether or not.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the first initialization operation control (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) corresponding to one game frame among a plurality of types of game frames and other game frames. Second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B) can be executed, and based on detection specific information at the time of execution of each of the first initialization operation control and the second initialization operation control Thus, the type of game frame may be determined.

  By doing so, an accurate determination can be made.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the first initialization operation control (for example, S304 and S305 of the third initialization process of S51B) corresponding to one game frame among a plurality of types of game frames and other game frames. Second initialization operation control (for example, S314 of the third initialization process of S51B) can be executed, and the setting content of the setting changeover switch 55 is confirmed in S301 of the third initialization process of S51B, and dedicated. If it is set to the frame, initialization operation control corresponding to the dedicated frame is executed in 304 and S305, and if it is set to the common frame, initialization operation control corresponding to the common frame is executed in S312 and S314. The game frame type is determined based on the serial data received from the serial conversion IC 130.

  By doing so, an accurate determination can be made. Specifically, when the game board 2 is mounted on the game frame, the effect control CPU 120 executes only S304 and S305 in the third initialization process of S51B when the setting changeover switch 55 is set to the dedicated frame. When the setting changeover switch 55 is set to the common frame, it is only necessary to execute S314. Therefore, even when there are many types of game frames, it is easy to determine whether the game board 2 and the game frames match. Can be determined.

  Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process in the third modification of the present invention.

  In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the motion control data and image data corresponding to the dedicated frame flag or the common frame flag set in the third initialization process of S51B in the effect control process in S55. Although the form which performs operation control and display control was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIG. 20, as production control process processing in S55, the first corresponding to a dedicated frame in advance. The effect control process (S55A) and the second effect control process (S55B) corresponding to the common frame can be executed. If the set flag is a dedicated frame, the first effect control process (S55A) If the set flag is a common frame, the second effect control process (S55B) is executed. It may be.

  Next, Modification 4 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams for explaining a fourth modification of the present invention, in which FIG. 21A is a perspective view showing a main part of a dedicated frame, and FIG. 21B is a perspective view showing a main part of a common frame.

  In the embodiment and the first to third modifications, the game board 2 is illustrated as being attachable to both the dedicated frame and the common frame 3 for the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame or the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame is mounted on the dedicated frame, it may be difficult to play a game.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 21A, a convex portion 800 is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame, and the convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame. The concave portion 801 capable of accommodating the convex portion 800 is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portion 801, while the concave portion 801 is formed at a position corresponding to the convex portion 800 on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the common frame as shown in FIG. do not do. In this way, when the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame is mounted on the common frame, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is to be closed, the convex portion 800 comes into contact with the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the state difficult to perform.

  Further, a part of the movable body provided in the game board 2 of the dedicated frame protrudes toward the opening / closing frame 50 at the origin position, and is accommodated in the window 51 side protruding forward when the opening / closing frame 50 is closed. In this case, even if the game board 2 having the dedicated frame is attached to the common frame, even if the open / close frame 50 of the common frame is to be closed, the convex portion 800 comes into contact with the back surface of the open / close frame 50 and cannot be closed. Thus, it is possible to avoid the closed opening / closing frame 50 from coming into contact with the movable body protruding forward from the game board 2 and damaging the movable body.

  Although not particularly illustrated, a convex portion is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame, and a concave portion capable of accommodating the convex portion at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the common frame. On the other hand, the concave portion may not be formed at a position corresponding to the convex portion on the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 of the dedicated frame, and in this way, the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame is made a dedicated frame. When mounted, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is to be closed, the convex portion comes into contact with the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and cannot be closed, so that it is difficult to play a game.

  As described above, when the gaming board 2 is mounted on the non-regular gaming machine frame 3, the opening / closing frame 50 cannot be closed, and it becomes difficult to play the game. By being able to play a game with the board 2 attached, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in the electronic components of the game frame.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the game board 2 is illustrated as being mounted on either the dedicated frame or the common frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game board 2 is mounted on an irregular game frame. In other words, the game board 2 corresponding to the dedicated frame may be mounted only on the dedicated frame, and the game board 2 corresponding to the common frame may be mounted only on the common frame.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which applied 1 A of pachinko machines provided so that the window part 51 might protrude ahead was illustrated as an example of a exclusive frame, this invention is not limited to this. The window portion 51 may not protrude forward like the pachinko gaming machine 1B.

  Moreover, in the said Example, when this invention is applied to the pachinko game machine which is an example of a game machine, the game board 2 is used as a 1st mechanism body, and an opening-and-closing frame is used as a 2nd mechanism body which can attach or detach a 1st mechanism body. Although the embodiment in which the game frame comprising 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is another example of the gaming machine. A variable display unit having a visual recognition area where a variable display device such as a reel can be visually recognized and provided with an effect control board is defined as a first mechanism body, and a main body portion to which the variable display unit can be attached and detached is defined as a second mechanism body. Can be considered.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which described two types of game frames, a special frame and a common frame, was illustrated as a classification of a game frame, this invention is not limited to this, The first as a special frame There may be a plurality of types of dedicated frames such as a dedicated frame and a second dedicated frame, or the common frame may have a plurality of types of common frames such as a first common frame and a second common frame. Good. That is, there may be three or more types of game frames. In addition, a plurality of types of game frames may be classified not only as a dedicated frame and a common frame, but also as a decoration (color variation) or a movable body to be mounted, that is, a type of detection means, etc. The classification may be a version and a new version. In other words, a plurality of types of game frames means that the number of detection means for detecting the state of the game frame (for example, the state of a mounted movable body, operation means, drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). A different thing and the thing from which the design and operation | movement aspect of the detection target object of one detection means differ among several detection means are contained.

  Specifically, the variable display unit includes an upper panel, a reel, and an effect control board that can close an upper portion of a front opening of the housing and has the visual recognition area. A lower panel that closes the lower part of the front opening of the housing and is provided in common with a plurality of models, such as a start switch, a stop switch, a medal insertion part, a credit switch, etc. It only has to be configured. In this way, the variable display unit can be attached to and detached from a plurality of types of main body units including a dedicated body used only for a specific model and a common body that can be used in common for a plurality of models. it can.

  Next, the window unit 51A constituting the window 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22A is a front view showing the window unit, and FIG. 22B is a rear view showing the window unit. FIG. 23A is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the window unit is viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 23B is a perspective view illustrating a state in which the window unit is viewed from an oblique rear. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 26 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a cylindrical portion. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional view showing the internal structure of the opening / closing frame and the gaming machine frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the window unit 51 </ b> A is disposed on the gaming area 10 side of the first transmission body 250 and the first transmission body 250, and at a position corresponding to the opening 2 c of the board surface plate 200. And a second transmission body 260 in which a hole 270 is formed.

  The first transmission body 250 includes a plate-shaped portion made of a front transmission plate 251 made of a transparent glass material, and a first cylindrical body 252 and a second cylindrical shape formed into a cylindrical shape from a non-transparent synthetic resin material. And a cylindrical portion composed of a body 253. The second cylindrical body 253 is provided inside the first cylindrical body 252 so as to be fitted from the opening on the back side, and the front opening of each of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 is a front transmission. It is formed slightly smaller than the plate 251, and the front transmission plate 251 is inserted from the opening on the back side of the first cylindrical body 252, and the second cylindrical body 253 is further fitted from the back side, The periphery of the transmission plate 251 is sandwiched between the opening periphery on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253.

  The first tubular body 252 has a tubular portion and a plate-like flange portion 256 formed so as to spread from the peripheral edge of the rear opening of the tubular portion. The outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second cylindrical body 253 are plated and reinforced by plating.

  The second cylindrical body 253 has a screw N1 attached to a plurality of mounting holes formed at the opening peripheral edge of the rear side, and a plurality of screws N1 formed at the opening peripheral edge of the rear side of the first cylindrical body 252. The first cylindrical body 252 is integrated with the first cylindrical body 252 by being screwed into the hole, and is sandwiched between the opening peripheral portions on the front side of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253, respectively. The front transmission plate 251 is also integrated to form the first transmission body 250. The peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251 and the opening peripheral edge on the front side of each of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 are joined via an adhesive or the like.

  The first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 are formed so that the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is longer than the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. The front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to be inclined in such a manner that the front transmission plate 251 is inclined downward toward the rear side, that is, the upper end is inclined forward.

  The above-described upper plate 90 is provided at a position below the window 51. The upper plate 90 is open at the top, so that it is possible to insert a game ball for playing games. Therefore, if the first transparent body 250 protrudes above the upper plate 90, it will interfere with the insertion of the game ball. End up. The first transmission body 250 is provided so as to protrude forward from the member forming the upper plate 90. Therefore, the front transmission plate 251 has the upper end positioned in front of the front end of the member forming the upper plate 90 and the lower side positioned in the rear side of the upper plate 90 so that the rear side is directed from the upper side to the lower side. It is arranged so as to be inclined.

  In the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion made up of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 has an extremely short front-rear length dimension of the lower wall part as compared with a front-rear length dimension of the upper wall part. The present invention is not limited to this, and the front and rear length dimensions of the upper wall part and the lower wall part may be substantially the same, and the front and rear length dimension of the upper wall part is the front and rear length of the lower wall part. It may be shorter than the length. Further, it may not be a cylindrical portion provided along the entire periphery of the front transmission plate 251, but may be an arched portion along a part of the periphery of the front transmission plate 251.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253, convex ridges 254A and concave ridges 254B extending in the front-rear direction. A reinforcing structure portion 254 made of is formed. Further, a convex strip 255A formed on the inner peripheral surface for forming the screw hole of the screw N1 in the first cylindrical body 252 or an inner portion for forming the mounting hole of the screw N1 in the second cylindrical body 253. The convex stripe portion 255 </ b> A formed on the peripheral surface and the concave stripe portion 255 </ b> B formed on the outer peripheral surface also function as the reinforcing structure portion 254. In this way, by forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion, and the strength is improved. To do.

  Moreover, the decoration part is provided in the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical part by such an uneven | corrugated | grooved part and the plating process given to the outer peripheral surface as mentioned above. In the present embodiment, the decorative portion is provided by the concavo-convex portion for reinforcement and plating, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral surface is colored or a pattern is provided. The decorative part may be configured.

  The second transmission body 260 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material such as transparent acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, and the like. And a frame body 262 formed in a frame shape from a light synthetic resin material. The rear transmission plate 261 is fixed to the back surface of the frame body 262 with an adhesive or the like so as to close the opening 262A of the frame body 262.

  The first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 configured as described above are configured such that screws N2 attached from the front side to a plurality of attachment holes formed in the flange portion 256 of the first cylindrical body 252 are frame bodies 262. A single window unit 51 </ b> A is formed by being integrated by screwing into a screw hole formed in the window. As shown in FIG. 3, the window unit 51 </ b> A is attached to the back side of the opening / closing frame 50 in the open position for opening the gaming machine frame 3 so as to close the opening (not shown) of the opening / closing frame 50. .

  The window unit 51A can be attached to and detached from the opening / closing frame 50, and can be replaced in accordance with a model change or the like. Specifically, the locking hook provided on the frame body 262 is used as the locking pin in a state where the locking pin protruding from the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 is inserted into the locking hole formed in the frame body 262. It is attached by locking.

  When the opening / closing frame 50 is rotated from the open position to the closed position and the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 is closed with the window unit 51A attached to the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50, as shown in FIG. A board 261 is disposed in front of the board surface board 200 of the game board 2 in parallel with the board surface board 200 with a predetermined gap, and a game ball can flow between the board surface board 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. A game area 10 is formed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, the rear transmission plate 261 is an entire area of the game area 10 surrounded by the guide rail 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board board 200 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front (player side). The hole 270 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 2 c formed in the board surface plate 200.

  In the present embodiment, the game area 10 is an area where a game ball can flow down, that is, an area excluding the opening 2c in an area surrounded by the guide rail 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board board 200, and an opening 2c. Corresponding areas, that is, areas where the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y and various movable bodies described later are provided so as to be visible from the player (areas shown by hatching in FIG. 26). In addition, the center decoration frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c, so that the game ball is restricted from flowing into the opening 2c.

  In the present embodiment, the hole 270 is different in shape and size from the opening 2c formed in the panel board 200, and is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c. The invention is not limited to this, and may be formed substantially in the same shape as the hole 270, or a part thereof may be located outside the opening 2c.

  Therefore, the gaming area 10 configured in this way is viewed through the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 constituting the window portion 51 from the player side in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (transparent). (See the window 51 shown by the mesh area in FIG. 22A). As shown in FIG. 27, the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A are installed in a standing state so as to be parallel to each other, whereas the front transmission plate 251 is gradually inclined rearward from the upper side to the lower side. Thus, since it is arranged in a forward tilting posture inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, the lower separation dimension L2 is shorter than the separation dimension L1 than the upper separation dimension L1 with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. ing.

  The first transmission body 250 including the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion and the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 as the cylindrical portions is the rear transmission that constitutes the second transmission body 260. A cylindrical portion formed of a first cylindrical body 252 and a second cylindrical body 253 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward with respect to the plate 261 and the window unit 51 </ b> A is attached to the opening / closing frame 50. The opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is provided so as to be inserted from the back side and protrude forward.

  Therefore, the rear transmission plate 261 that forms the game area 10 together with the game board surface 200 </ b> A is accommodated within the plate thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the opening / closing frame 50, while the cylindrical portion is provided so as to protrude forward with respect to the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50. Thus, the front transmission plate 251 can be disposed as far as possible from the rear transmission plate 261 as much as possible without increasing the longitudinal dimension of the opening / closing frame 50. Thereby, a wide space S can be formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261.

  Moreover, the upper wall part of the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 is formed so that it may incline below toward the front, and external light from the front upper direction of the pachinko game machine 1 is made into the game area | region 10. Since the upper part of the game area 10 is hidden by the upper wall part because it is difficult to enter, the player's eye position is located below the upper wall part, so that it can be seen by looking up.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a magnetic sensor is erroneously operated by pressing a magnet against the front transmission plate 251 to illegally generate a prize, or a game ball flowing down the game area 10 is generated by a magnetic force. There is a possibility that an illegal act such as illegally guiding may be performed, but without increasing the thickness of the rear transmission plate 261 by increasing the separation dimensions L1 and L2 between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since the front transmission plate 251 can be moved away from the game area 10 as much as possible, the influence of the magnetic force of the magnet can be attenuated, so that illegal acts by the magnet can be suitably suppressed. In addition, in a gaming machine equipped with a magnet sensor that detects unauthorized magnetism, the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior can be reduced by increasing the distance between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 in a range that cannot be detected by the magnet sensor. While being able to suppress suitably, the number of arrangement | positioning of a magnet sensor can be reduced.

  Next, based on FIGS. 28 to 36, a movable body unit including the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R will be described. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the operation standby mode is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the first operation mode is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable body unit in the second operation mode is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 31 is a schematic view of a movable body unit in an operation standby mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 32 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the first operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 33 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the second operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 34 is a schematic view of a movable body unit in an operation standby form as viewed from the side. FIG. 35 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the first operation mode as viewed from the side. FIG. 36 is a schematic view of the movable body unit in the second operation mode as viewed from the side.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various effects related to the game such as the effect display variable display control and the notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been.

  The notice control effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 while the effect symbol is being displayed is, for example, a jackpot notice effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice that suggests whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol that indicates whether or not to reach. Multiple notices that are executed at the start of change display or when reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to notify, a latent notice to notify whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether it is latent or not) Including.

  In the present embodiment, the movable body effect by the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R described below, and these movable bodies and the speaker 8L, Various effects such as a combined effect by 8R, the LED for effect 9 and the like, and an operation effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the operation means such as the stick controller 31A can be executed as various notices.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 36, the movable body unit is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y provided on the back side of the game board 2, and the effect display devices 5A, 5X. , 5Y, the base member 700 fixed to the back cover 70, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L, 500R and the 4 movable bodies 600L and 600R. The base member 700 is formed in a square frame shape by an upper side, a left side, a right side, and a lower side, and each upper side, left side, right side, and lower side are each of the display screens of the effect display device 5A. It arrange | positions along a side and can visually recognize the display screen of production | presentation display apparatus 5A, 5X, 5Y through the opening of the center. As will be described later, this movable body unit can be changed to an operation standby mode, a first operation mode, and a second operation mode.

  The first movable body 300 includes a slide plate 301 movably attached along a rail 701 extending obliquely downward from the upper side of the base member 700, and a rotation shaft 305 at the tip of the slide plate 301. Main body 302 pivotally supported, first projecting section 303 and second projecting section 304 attached to main body section 302 so as to project and retract, first drive mechanism 310, second drive mechanism 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a fourth drive mechanism 340 (see FIG. 2).

  The first movable body 300 is a first standby position that is an origin position disposed above the game board 2 by a first drive mechanism 310 including a first drive motor 311 and gears (see FIGS. 31 and 34). And a first effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 35) arranged on the center side of the game board 2 and is movable along the rail 701. The first drive mechanism 310 includes a first standby position sensor and a first effect position sensor that detect the position of the first movable body 300.

  Since the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is attached so as to be movable in the front-rear direction along the rail 701 of the base member 700, the first movable body 300 includes the first transmission body 250, the second transmission body 260, and the like. Accelerate during this period to advance. That is, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700 constitute acceleration advancement means. Further, in order to further enhance the acceleration performance, a material or shape having a lower sliding resistance between the slide plate 301 and the rail 701 may be used. Further, lubricating oil or the like may be applied to further reduce the sliding resistance. Moreover, you may make it provide the acceleration assistance means (for example, spring member etc.) (not shown) which assists the acceleration of the 1st movable body 300. For example, acceleration of the first movable body 300 can be supported by a spring force that attempts to return the spring member to the natural length from the biased state in which the spring member is contracted to the natural length. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

  The main body 302 has a substantially hexahedron shape, and is fixed to a rotation shaft 305 that faces in the left-right direction. Hereinafter, in the main body 302, a surface facing the front in a normal state (operation standby mode) will be described as a surface A, and a surface facing upward will be described as a surface B.

  The rotation shaft 305 is rotated by a second drive mechanism 320 including a second drive motor and gears (not shown), and the surface A of the main body 302 faces the front and the surface B turns upward. A moving standby state (see FIGS. 31 and 34), a first rotating state (see FIGS. 32 and 35) in which the surface A faces obliquely forward and upward and the surface B faces backward, and the surface A is obliquely forward. The rotation state of the main body 302 can be switched between a second rotation state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) in which the side B faces downward and the surface B faces obliquely upward in the upper direction. The second drive mechanism 320 includes a rotation standby position sensor that detects the rotation state of the first movable body 300, a first rotation position sensor, and a second rotation position sensor.

  The first protrusion 303 is in a first storage state (FIGS. 31, 33, 34, and 34) built in the main body 302 by the third drive motor 330 and a third drive mechanism 330 including a gear and a rack (not shown). 36) and a first projecting state projecting outward from the surface A of the main body 302 (see FIGS. 32 and 35). In the first storage state, the entire first protrusion 303 is stored in the main body 302 and does not protrude outside from the main body 302. The third drive mechanism 330 includes a first protruding position sensor and a first storage position sensor that detect the state of the first protruding portion 303.

  The second protrusion 304 is in a second housed state (FIGS. 31, 32, and 34) partially incorporated in the main body 302 by a fourth drive motor 341 and a fourth drive mechanism 340 including a gear and a rack (not shown). 35) and a second protruding state (see FIGS. 33 and 36) protruding outward from the surface B of the main body 302. In the second storage state, a part of the first projecting portion 303 projects outward from the surface B of the main body 302, but the back surface of the surface B in the rotation standby state or the first rotation state. Since it is arranged on the side, it is less noticeable from the player (front side). The fourth drive mechanism 340 includes a second protruding position sensor and a second storage position sensor that detect the state of the second protruding portion 304.

  The second movable body 400 is attached to the lower side of the base member 700, and is disposed on the lower side of the game board 2 by a fifth drive mechanism 410 including a fifth drive motor, a gear, a rack, and the like (not shown). 2 Moves vertically between the standby position (see FIGS. 31, 33, 34, and 36) and the second effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 35) disposed on the center side of the game board 2. It is possible. The second movable body 400 is inclined such that the upper end of the second movable body 400 falls forward. The fifth drive mechanism 410 includes a second standby position sensor and a second effect position sensor that detect the position of the second movable body 400.

  The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are attached to the left and right sides of the lower side portion of the base member 700, and are driven by sixth drive mechanisms 510L and 510R including sixth drive motors 511L and 511R, rotating arms (not shown), gears, and the like. A third standby position (see FIGS. 31, 33, 34, and 36) disposed on the lower side of the game board 2, and a third effect position (see FIGS. 32 and 36) disposed on the center side of the game board 2. 35)), and is movable in the vertical direction. Specifically, the pivot arm pivots about an axis (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, and each of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R is second in the second standby position at the third standby position. It arrange | positions in the position spaced apart from the right and left both sides of the movable body 400, and is arrange | positioned in the position close | similar to the both right and left sides of the 2nd movable body 400 in a 2nd production position in a 3rd production position. The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are inclined such that the upper ends of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R fall forward. The sixth drive mechanisms 510L and 510R include a third standby position sensor and a third effect position sensor that detect the positions of the third movable bodies 500L and 500R.

  The fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are attached to the left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700. The seventh drive mechanisms 610L and 610R including a seventh drive motor, a gear, a rack, and the like (not shown) It is possible to move up and down between a fourth standby position (see FIGS. 31 and 32) arranged on the upper side and a fourth effect position (see FIG. 33) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It has become. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move so as to approach each other from the left and right sides of the upper side of the base member 700 toward the center, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R The fourth standby position is disposed at a position spaced from both the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 at the first standby position, and at the fourth presentation position at a position close to both the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 at the first presentation position. Be placed. The seventh drive mechanisms 610L and 610R include a fourth standby position sensor and a fourth effect position sensor that detect the positions of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first standby position (origin position), the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L. 500R is disposed at the third standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are disposed at the fourth standby position. The first movable body 300 is in the rotation standby state, and the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion The unit 304 is in the first storage state and the second storage state. Since each movable body is arrange | positioned at the peripheral side of the opening 2c of the game board 2 at this time, the display screen of production | presentation display apparatus 5A, 5X, 5Y can be visually recognized now from a player (front side) ( (See FIG. 31). For example, as shown in FIG. 1, it can be said that the first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is a position where the first movable body 300 does not overlap the effect display device 5A. In addition, the 1st standby position (origin position) of the 1st movable body 300 is not limited to this, For example, it is good also as a position where the 1st movable body 300 overlaps with a part of effect display apparatus 5A. As shown in FIG. 34, only a part of the front side of the first movable body 300 at the first standby position (origin position) is slightly passed through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although it has entered between 250 and the second transmission body 260, it may be prevented from entering.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second effect position, the third movable body 500L, 500R is arranged at the third effect position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth standby position, the first movable body 300 is in the first rotation state, and the first protrusion 303 is the first projection section 303. The second projecting portion 304 is in the second storage state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the first projecting portion 303 are disposed on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and have a predetermined shape. They are combined by contacting or coming close to each other to form an object (see FIG. 32). In other words, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 can control the first movable body 300 to move the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R so that they can be combined.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, the third movable body 500L, 500R is disposed at the third standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are disposed at the fourth presentation position. The first movable body 300 is in the second rotation state, and the first protrusion 303 is the first projection section 303. The housed state is entered, and the second projecting portion 304 is in the second projecting state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, and the second projecting portion 304 are disposed on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and a structure having a shape different from that of the first operation mode is used. They are combined by contacting or coming close to each other as shown (see FIG. 33). In other words, after performing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 can perform control to move the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R to the first movable body 300 so as to be combined.

  Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first operation mode, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode. , The second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 (FIG. 35). FIG. 36).

  Therefore, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined, the moving direction of the first movable body 300 in the first control, That is, since it is located at a different position in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be generated.

  Next, an example of the operation control of the movable body unit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of each movable body and the effect LED in the movable body effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 34, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is configured such that a part on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is rearward at the first standby position. It is located on the front transmission plate 251 side, that is, on the front side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261 (see particularly the solid line portion in FIGS. 31 and 34).

  In the movable body effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 satisfies the start condition of the movable body effect (for example, operating means (for example, an effect button or a stick during the execution of the movable effect). The first movable body 300, the second movable body, etc.) when the operation of the operation means is detected during the operation reception period of the controller 31A or the like, or when the operation valid period ends and the execution timing of the movable body is reached. 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are operated. The effect LED 9 performs a light emission effect in the first light emission mode.

  Specifically, the first movable body 300 is moved obliquely downward from the first standby position toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). 31 and 34, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is the rear. Through the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261, it is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, and the main body 302 is disposed on the front side with respect to the first standby position. That is, the CPU 120 for effect control has the first movable body 300 in the first standby position, with the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the first control of moving to the front side until the rear transmission plate 261 is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side. The second movable body 400 moves toward the second effect position, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move toward the third effect position.

  When the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move to a predetermined position, they are detected by a first effect position sensor, a second effect position sensor, and a third effect position sensor (not shown), The effect control CPU 120 causes the first movable body 300 to be in the first rotation state based on the fact that the first effect position sensor, the second effect position sensor, and the third effect position sensor detect each movable object. The rotation shaft 305 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right side (first rotation, see arrow 2 in FIGS. 32 and 35). The effect control CPU 120 stops the first rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the first rotation position sensor. At this time, the front end sides of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R tilt forward (see arrow 3 in FIGS. 32 and 35), and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third The movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined. Even when rotating, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Yes.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the second light emitting mode, and the surface A of the main body 302 until the third drive mechanism 330 detects the first protrusion 303 by the first protrusion position sensor. The first projecting state is obtained by projecting outward from the first position. As described above, when the first movable body 300 is in the first rotation state, the surface A of the main body portion 302 faces diagonally forward and upward, and thus the first projecting portion 303 projects diagonally forward and upward. (See arrow 4 in FIGS. 32 and 35). That is, the first protrusion 303 moves in a direction that intersects the moving direction (obliquely downward direction) of the main body 302. In other words, after executing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first protrusion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302, to be the first control. It is possible to execute the second control for moving in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction). By executing the first control and the second control, the movable body unit changes to the first operation mode.

  As described above, the first movable body 300 is a space portion S in which the first protrusion 303 is formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 after the main body 302 is moved obliquely forward and downward. Since it protrudes diagonally forward and upward, the moving operation of the first protrusion 303 can be suitably shown without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. Further, the front transmission plate 251 is not contacted even when changing to the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

  Further, in the first operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body 302 is located in the space S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state. As shown in FIG. 32, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first protrusion 303 moves so as to spread around the main body 302, that is, protrudes, so that a part of the main body 302 is expanded. And since the 1st movable body 300 seems to expand, it can give an impact to a player.

  In addition, even after the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the first protruding portion 303 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It protrudes out of the area to be played, that is, it does not protrude toward the game area 10 side of the game ball, so the first protrusion 303 does not hinder the visual recognition of the game ball.

  In the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the first projecting portion 303 form a predetermined shape. To do. Specifically, the second movable body 400 is disposed below or in contact with the first movable body 300, and the third movable bodies 500 </ b> L and 500 </ b> R are disposed on the left and right sides of the first movable body 300. Since the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R serve as support means for the first movable body 300 and support each other by being arranged close to each other, the projecting operation of the first projecting portion 303 is performed. In addition, shaking of the first movable body 300 after the protruding operation is suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

  In addition, most of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are disposed closer to the game area 10 (rear side) than the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300. , A sense of depth can be generated in a structure formed by merging.

  Moreover, since the brightness | luminance of the 2nd light emission mode of LED9 for production | presentation has fallen rather than the 1st light emission mode, when a movable body unit is the 1st operation | movement form (at the time of 2nd control), each light by the LED9 for production | presentation A decrease in the visibility of the movable body can be suppressed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first protrusion 303 until the first storage position sensor detects the first protrusion 303 based on the fact that the state of the first operation mode of the movable body unit has elapsed for the first time. The second movable body 400 is moved to the second standby position and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are moved to the third standby position until the second standby position sensor and the third standby position sensor detect it. (See arrow 5 in FIGS. 33 and 36). Next, after the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R reach a position where they do not interfere with the rotational movement of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 is rotated so as to be in the second rotational state. The moving shaft 305 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the right side (second rotation, see arrows 6 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the effect LED 9 is caused to emit light in the third light emission mode. The effect control CPU 120 stops the second rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the second rotation position sensor.

  Then, the second projecting portion 304 is projected until it is detected by the second projecting position sensor to be in the second projecting state (see the arrow 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36), and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are It moves toward the fourth effect position until it is detected by the fourth effect position sensor (see arrow 7 in FIGS. 33 and 36). That is, after executing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second projecting portion 304 that is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 to be in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control for moving in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction). By executing the first control and the second control, the movable body unit changes to the second operation mode. At this time, the production LED 9 is caused to emit light in the fourth light emission mode.

  Further, in the second operation mode in which the predetermined part on the front side of the main body part 302 is located in the space part S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the second protruding part 304 is changed to the second protruding state. As shown in FIG. 33, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second protrusion 304 moves so as to spread around the main body 302, that is, protrudes, so that a part of the main body 302 is expanded. And since the 1st movable body 300 seems to expand, it can give an impact to a player.

  In addition, the second protrusion 304 corresponds to the hole 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 even after the second protrusion 304 has changed to the second protrusion state so as to spread around the main body 302. It protrudes out of the area to be played, that is, it does not protrude to the flow-down area of the game ball, so that the visual recognition of the game ball is not hindered by the first protrusion 303.

  In the second operation form of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, and the second protrusion 304 are combined so as to form a structure having a shape different from that of the first operation form. To do. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600 </ b> L and 600 </ b> R are arranged on the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 so that the fourth movable bodies 600 </ b> L and 600 </ b> R are in contact with or close to each other. Therefore, the second projecting portion 304 is prevented from projecting, the first movable body 300 is shaken after the projecting operation, and the posture can be stabilized.

  In addition, most of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the game area 10 side (rear side) with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300, and thus are configured to be combined. A sense of depth can be generated in the structure (see FIG. 30).

  Moreover, since the brightness | luminance of the 4th light emission mode of LED9 for production | presentation has fallen compared with the 1st light emission mode and the 3rd light emission mode, when a movable body unit is a 2nd operation | movement form (at the time of 2nd control), it is for production. Decrease in visibility of each movable body can be suppressed by the light of the LED 9.

  When the second operation mode of the movable body unit ends the rendering operation by each movable body when the predetermined time elapses, the rendering control CPU 120 moves the second protrusion 304 until it is detected by the second storage position sensor. The second movable state is set, and the first movable body 300 is set to the first standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are set to the fourth standby position until detection by the first standby position sensor and the fourth standby position sensor. Move toward (storage operation). At this time, the production LED 9 is caused to emit light in the fifth light emission mode. When the first movable body 300 moves to the first standby position and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the fourth standby position, the movable body presentation by the movable body unit is completed.

  In addition, the 1st light emission mode-the 5th light emission mode by LED9 for production should just be a different aspect according to the various operation modes of a movable body. The light emission mode includes, for example, a color to emit light, luminance, lighting or blinking, blinking speed, and the like.

  Next, the production effect in the light emission production by the production LED 9 and the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a schematic view of the light emitting aspects of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from the side, and FIG. 38B is a schematic view of the light emission aspects of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from above. .

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), the production LED 9 arranged around the first transmission body 250 on the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50 irradiates light toward the first transmission body 250. Since the outer peripheral surface of the first transmission body 250 (first cylindrical body 252) is plated, the light from the production LED 9 is reflected and does not enter the first transmission body 250. ing. Further, ambient outside light R other than the light from the production LED 9 (for example, light such as indoor light of a game shop or light from an adjacent gaming machine) does not enter the first transmission body 250 in the same manner. It has become.

  That is, the visibility of each movable body and the game area 10 can be prevented from being lowered, and the light emitting effects of the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR can be prevented from being affected. In addition, by irradiating the periphery of the first transmission body 250, it is possible to make it stand out so as to surround the periphery of each movable body, and not only to a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also to the surroundings. You can appeal the production.

  The movable body LED includes a movable body LED 350A attached to the main body 302 facing the front side (player side), a movable body LED 350B attached to the second projecting portion 304, and movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR facing the side surface. Each light which faces the back side (game area 10 side) consists of movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR (light emitting means). Light to the front side by the movable body LEDs 350A and 350B is irradiated to the front side through the front transmission plate 251, and light to the back side by the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR is a game area 10 (a game ball flowing down the game area 10, It is designed to irradiate a prize opening and a guide passage. The light toward the side surfaces of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is irradiated toward the first transmission body 250, but the inner peripheral surface of the first transmission body 250 (second cylindrical body 253) is plated. Therefore, the light from the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is reflected to the front side. That is, it is possible to collect the light on the front side and enhance the effect, and it is possible to prevent the light emission effect of the effect LED 9 from being affected.

  Next, an example of the display device effect in the effect display devices 5X and 5Y will be described with reference to FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram showing a standby state indicating the normal time of the effect display device, FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and FIG. 39C is a second diagram of the effect display device. It is the schematic which shows an operation state.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, in the normal state of the effect display device, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are in a standby state in which they are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A. In this standby state, the standby state is arranged with the display unit slightly tilted so as to face the center side.

  Note that rail members (guide means) (not shown) for guiding the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided above and below the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, respectively. This rail member is composed of a portion extending in the front-rear direction at a position on the front side of the effect display device 5A, and a portion extending in a direction away from the left and right ends of the front and rear portions, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Is attached to the rail member so as to be rotatable about a vertical rotation axis. As described above, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided to be movable and rotatable by the display device drive mechanism 900 including a rail member, a drive motor, and the like (not shown).

  When the predetermined start condition for the display device effect is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y closer to the front side position of the effect display device 5A as shown in FIG. After that, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operation state by moving from the rear side position of the rear transmission plate 261 to the front side position through the hole 270. That is, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a standby state at a position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and a predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y passes through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Thus, it is possible to execute the third control in which the rear transmission plate 261 is moved to the front side until it is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side.

  The effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly inclined so as to face the center side, so that the player can easily see the display unit. The movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be suitably shown while maintaining the state.

  When the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261, the effect control CPU 120 separates the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from each other as shown in FIG. The display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is rotated by a rotation motor (not shown) so as to face the outside in the left-right direction. In other words, after performing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fourth control for moving in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the moving direction (front-rear direction) in the third control. By executing the third control and the fourth control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y change to the second operation state.

  In addition, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y face outward in the left-right direction in the second operation state, it is possible to make the display content of the display unit visible to non-players. The rail member that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y has the effect display devices 5X and 5X when changing from the standby state to the first operation state and when changing from the first operation state to the second operation state. Since it functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X and 5Y or the rear transmission plate 261 from being damaged.

  Next, the relationship between the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the opening / closing frame is opened in the second operation mode of the movable body unit.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 is formed larger than the first movable body 300. More specifically, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened and closed, the hole 270 also rotates about the hinge portion (vertical rotation axis) of the opening / closing frame 50. The first movable body 300 in the second operation mode of the movable body unit is the most protruding movable body in each operation mode of the movable body unit, and the front portion of the first movable body 300 (the closed state of the opening / closing frame 50) The portion disposed on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the hole portion 270 is disposed in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270.

  Therefore, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the rear transmission plate 261 does not contact the first movable body 300. According to this, for example, when an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, it becomes necessary to perform maintenance by opening the open / close frame 50. Even if it exists, since the opening-and-closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 can be prevented from being damaged.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. When the player rotates the hitting operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is launched toward the game area 10. Based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed down the game area 10 has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. After the start of the normal symbol change, if the specified time, which is the normal symbol change time, has elapsed, and the normal symbols other than the normal symbol are displayed in a stopped state, the normal symbol change display result is “out of normal”. Become. If the specific normal symbol (the symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variation display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”, and the release control in which the movable plate of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is retracted from the game area 10 is performed. The normal opening control is performed to return to the closed position protruding into the game area 10 when a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that when the usual game cannot be started, such as during the following opening control in which another usual game is already being executed, the execution of the usual game is suspended up to four or the like. The held ordinary game is started when it becomes possible to start.

  Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first special condition game or the big hit game state has ended, for example, after the first start condition is satisfied because the game ball has won the first start winning opening, etc. Then, a special game is started by the first special symbol display 4A. In addition, after the second start condition is established because the game ball has won the second start winning opening, etc., the second start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state. Based on this, a special game is started by the second special symbol display 4B. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game has already been executed or the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, four etc. The special figure game is suspended with an upper limit of. The reserved special game is executed when the start condition is satisfied.

  In the special game, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol (special graphic display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (special symbol such as “3”, “7”, etc.) is stopped and displayed, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol (losing) If a symbol (for example, a special figure such as “-”) is stopped and displayed, it becomes “disconnected”. After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. The big hit gaming state is an advantageous state advantageous for the player. When the variation display result in the special figure game is “losing”, it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, a special winning prize ball device 7 has a special prize opening door for a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. In the period until the occurrence of, the grand prize opening is opened. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16” or the like) (the big prize opening is closed in a period other than the round game).

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5A, the variation display of the effect symbols is started in response to the start of the special game. In the period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol to the end of the variation display, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state. The reach state refers to an effect symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. This is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  In the embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display. Normal reach, super reach A (development from normal reach), and super reach B (development from normal reach) are prepared as reach productions. In the embodiment, the big hit expectation is higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach (normal reach not developed into super reach). The big hit expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and here is also a ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is “big hit”.

  When the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined big hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. The finalized effect symbol is derived and displayed (the display result of the variable effect symbol display is “big hit”). As an example, the same effect symbol (for example, “7” for probability variable big hit, non-probable big hit, on the predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) "6" etc.) are all displayed at the same time. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41B, which will be described later, “non-probable change” includes a non-probable big hit in which the promotion effect (failure) is executed during the big hit and a non-probable big hit in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. There are two types of “probability change”: probability change big hit in which the promotion effect (success) is executed during the big hit and probability change big hit in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. The promotion effect is a probability change promotion effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds) during the big hit, and is an effect that displays whether the promotion to the probability change big hit has succeeded or failed. When the jackpot type is “non-probable change (promotion effect failed)”, the same effect symbols “6” are all stopped and displayed, and the promising change promotion effect (failure) is executed in 7 rounds during the big hit. When the jackpot type is “probable change (successful promotion effect)”, the same effect symbols “6” are all stopped and displayed, and the probable change promotion effect (success) is executed in seven rounds during the big hit. Note that the probable promotion effect may be executed for rounds other than 7 rounds or a plurality of rounds, fanfare effect, ending effect, or the like. Further, the promotion effect may be a round promotion effect that notifies the continuation of the round.

  When the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is not the reach mode, and the determined effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. In addition, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode, the determined effect symbol of a predetermined reach combination (reach lose combination) that is not a jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, the fixed effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable variable big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed, and the variation display result is “non-probable big hit bonus”. ”Is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased. For this reason, the state in which the time reduction control is performed (time reduction state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, the finalized design symbol that becomes a predetermined probable big hit combination (also called “probable big hit combination”) is stopped and the fluctuation display result is “probable big hit” When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the end, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. For this reason, the state in which the probability variation control is performed (the probability variation state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. When the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again to the big hit gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is established, the probability variation control is performed a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state ends (for example, the same as the number of time reductions 100) When the special figure game is executed, the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state is finished is determined to have “probable fall”. When it ends, etc.

  When the short-time control is performed, the normal symbol variation time (normal diagram variation time) in the regular game is shorter than that in the normal state, and the regular symbol variation display result is “normal diagram” in each regular game. The control for improving the probability of “winning” than in the normal state, and the movement control time for performing the movement control of the movable plate in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “normal hitting” is normal. The second start condition may be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the state longer than in the state and a control to increase the number of movements compared to the normal state. The control (electricity chew support control, high opening control) which is advantageous for the player by increasing the value is performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is likely to be established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. Time to become is shortened.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the advantageous state for the player, such as a big hit gaming state, a short-time state, or a probable change state. The probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return process after power-on) Is controlled in the same manner as when (1) is not executed.

  The time-short state is also referred to as “high base”, the gaming state that is not the time-short state is also referred to as “low base” and “non-time-short state”, and the probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”. A gaming state that is not in a probable change state is also referred to as “low probability” or “non-probability change”. The gaming state when the probability change state and the short time state are also referred to as a “high probability high base”. The gaming state when it is in a probable change state but not in a short time state is also referred to as a “high probability low base”. A gaming state that is not in a probable change state but in a short time state is also referred to as a “low probability high base”. The normal state is also called “low probability low base”.

  Next, main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts and the like. In each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be performed.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
On the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds), that is, at an interrupt request signal supply interval. It is executed every certain time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a switch process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process, a normal symbol process process, a command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. As a result, game control and the like are realized.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is used in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. The special symbol process is a process for realizing the holding or execution of a special figure game, a big hit game state, or the like based on the determination result in the switch process. The normal symbol process is based on the judgment result in the switch process, and holds and executes the ordinary game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second starting prize opening) is released at the time of each ordinary figure. It is a process to do. The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command transmitted and set in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Direction control command set for transmission in special symbol process)
Next, an effect control command that is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in the command control process will be described. FIG. 41A shows examples of main effect control commands. The following “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command 81XX (H), display result designation command 8CXX (H), symbol confirmation designation command 8F00 (H), hit start designation command A000 (H), hit end designation command A300 (H), first start winning designation A command B100 (H), a second start winning designation command B200 (H), and a big prize opening prize designation command B300 (H) are prepared in advance. “XX” is EXT data. A numerical value corresponding to the variable display result is set in “XX” of the display result specifying command 8CXX (H) (for example, as shown in FIG. "01" for "big hit", "02" for "non-probable big hit (promotion promotion failure)", "03" for "probable big hit", "04" for "probable big hit (successful promotion effect)").

(Special symbol process)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. Each flag, each counter, and each timer described below are provided in the RAM 102. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process (S101). For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the first start port switch 22A is on (whether it has been determined to be on by the switch process or the other switches). If it is ON, it is determined whether the first special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it has not reached the upper limit number, it is determined that the first start winning has occurred and the random number circuit 104 or random number values for game random number update processing, random number value MR1 for determining special figure display result (variable display result of special game), random number value MR2 for determining jackpot type, variation pattern determination Random number MR3 is extracted, and the extracted numerical value is held in the first special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 102 as first reservation data. It is determined whether the second start port switch 22B is on. If it is ON, it is determined whether the second special figure reserved memory number has reached the upper limit number (for example, 4). If the upper limit number is not reached, it is determined that the second start winning has occurred, Similarly, random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted, and the extracted numerical values are held in the second special figure reservation storage unit of the RAM 102 as second reservation data. The first hold data and the second hold data are held in the order of winning a prize. The number of the first special figure reserved memory and the number of the second special figure reserved memory may be specified by the number of the first reserved data and the second reserved data, and the counter for counting each stored number (the same applies hereinafter). In the start winning determination process, when there is a first start win, transmission setting of a first start win designation command and an addition designation command for the first special figure reserved memory number is performed, and when there is a second start win The transmission setting of the second start winning designation command and the second special figure reservation storage number addition designation command is performed.

  After executing S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag. The following time reduction flag is a flag that is turned on in the time reduction state, and the probability variation flag is a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state.

  The special symbol normal process of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. For example, when the second special figure holding storage number is not “0”, the CPU 103 performs a process for executing the second special figure game, updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1”, and performs this process. finish. When the second special figure holding memory number is “0” and the first special figure holding memory number is not “0”, a process for executing the first special figure game is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “1”. The process is terminated. When both are “0”, this processing is terminated.

  In the process for executing the second special figure game, the oldest second reserved data among the second reserved data (random numbers MR1 to MR3) held in the second special figure reservation storage unit is stored as the second special figure hold. Read from the storage unit to a predetermined buffer of the RAM 102. The read second hold data is deleted from the second special figure hold storage unit. The second special chart to be executed this time based on the random number MR1 and the jackpot determination table (stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table hereinafter) of the second reserved data read to the predetermined buffer. The game variable display result ("big hit" or "losing") is determined. The determination ratio of “big hit” is higher in the probability variation state (when the probability variation flag is on) than in the non-probability variation state (when the probability variation flag is off). When it is determined as “big hit”, the big hit type (“probable change” or “non-probable change”) is determined based on the random value MR2 and the big hit type determination table. In the embodiment, any one of “non-probability change”, “non-probability change (promotion effect failure)”, “probability change”, and “probability change (promotion effect success)” is determined. The determination result and the information to execute the second special figure game are held in the RAM 102 and are referred to as appropriate (the same applies to other determinations).

  Also in the process for executing the first special figure game, the same process as that for executing the second special figure game is performed, the first reserved data is read out to a predetermined buffer, and the first special figure game is variable. The display result is determined (including determination of jackpot type).

  The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. For example, the CPU 103 determines (selects) the variation pattern and sets the execution start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game. The variation pattern designates a variable display execution time (special drawing variation time) and a variable display pattern of the effect symbol.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the loss variation pattern includes PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2 to PA3-4. As the big hit hour fluctuation pattern, there are B3-2 to PB3-4. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for time reduction (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than normal (PA1-1). PA3-2 and PB3-2 designate execution of normal reach (no development to super reach), PA3-3 and PB3-3 designate execution of super reach A (develop from normal reach), and PA3 -4 and PB3-4 designate execution of super reach B (development from normal reach).

  When the variable display result of this time is “big hit”, the CPU 103 sets PB 3-2 to PB 3-2-2 based on the random number MR 3 of the first and second reserved data read into the predetermined buffer and the big pattern change pattern determination table. One of PB3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. When the variable display result is “losing” and in a non-short-time state (when the time-short flag is off), PA 1-1, PA 3 are based on the random number MR 3 and the variation pattern determination table for the first loss. Any one of −2 to PA3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. When the variable display result is “losing” and in the time-short state (when the time-shorting flag is on), based on the random number MR3 and the variation pattern determination table for the second loss, PA2-1, PA3- Any one of 2 to PA3-4 is determined as the current variation pattern. The determination ratio of the variation pattern is higher in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1> PA3-2> PA3-3> PA3-4 when lost. The big hit is higher in the order of PB3-4> PB3-3> PB3-2. For this reason, the big hit expectation degree is high in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  After determining the variation pattern, for example, the drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is started. Display result designation command, subtraction designation command for first or second special figure reserved memory number, variation pattern designation command for designating the above determination result or the current gaming state (which can be specified by the state of the probability variation flag or the short time flag) Is set, the special process flag value is set to “2”, and the process is terminated.

  The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. For example, the CPU 103 has elapsed time since the start of the special figure game (measured by a timer or the like. The same applies to other elapsed times) has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. (The timing for deriving the variable display result) is determined, and if not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is sent to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol. This process is terminated after the process of supplying the display 4B and changing the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation time is reached, a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the symbol of the current variable display result (in the case of “losing”, “ -"," 7 "for" probable big hit "," 3 "for" non-probable big hit ", etc., stop display (derived display), set symbol designating command transmission setting, and special figure process flag The value of is updated to “3”. By executing S112 repeatedly every time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the special game is realized.

  The special symbol stop process of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. For example, when the current variable display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 resets the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag to OFF. After that, transmission setting of the hit start designation command is performed, the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, and this processing is terminated. In the case of “shortage” in the time-short state, it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-short state has been executed (for example, it can be counted by a counter or the like), and a predetermined number of variable displays are executed. If there is, the time reduction flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is set to “0”, and the process is terminated. Even in the case of “losing” and not being in a short time state, when the predetermined number of variable displays has not been executed, the process is terminated by setting the value of the special figure process flag to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time since the transmission setting of the hit start designation command has reached a preset fanfare waiting time (waiting time from the start of fanfare in the big hit gaming state to the end), If not, the jackpot release pre-processing is terminated. When the fanfare waiting time is reached, the special prize process flag is updated to “5” by performing a process (opening of a solenoid drive signal) for opening the big prize opening in order to start a round game. By repeating S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing of S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. The number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening) reaches a predetermined value (for example, “9”) (it may be counted by a counter or the like), or after the round game is started ( When the elapsed time of the grand prize opening has reached the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) of the round game and it is time to end the round game, the grand prize opening is returned to the closed state. A process of ending the round game (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) is performed. At this time, when the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted with a counter or the like), a setting to send a hit end designation command is performed, and the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “7”, and this process ends. When it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, and this process is terminated. If the current time is not the timing for ending the round game, the processing is terminated as it is (the processing for maintaining the big prize opening in an open state may be performed). By repeating S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening to the closed state, and finally the big prize opening is closed.

  The big hit release post-processing in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the big prize opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (round game interval period). In this case, the closed state is maintained, and the present process ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, in order to start the round game, a process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and this process is terminated.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the big winning opening is opened in S114.

  The jackpot end process of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. For example, the elapsed time from the end of the last round game (after closing the big prize opening) to a predetermined ending waiting time (waiting time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit gaming state) If it has not been reached, this process is terminated. When the ending waiting time is reached, the ending ends, so when the big hit type is “probable change”, turn on the hourly flag and the probability change flag. Leave the flag off. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and this process ends.

(Operation of production control board 12)
FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the flag is cleared (S53), and the following process is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 3) is the presentation control command stored in the buffer area, settings and control corresponding to the analysis result are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display and operation control of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are executed. . Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect random number update processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating effect random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (S56).

  Next, when an abnormality or an error has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification control process for executing notification of abnormality, etc. (S57), and then proceeds to S52. As shown in FIG. 45B, in the notification control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a door opening detection switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the opening and closing frame 50 is ON (S61). For example, a door open detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11. Based on the detection of opening of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch, the main board 11 transmits a door opening designation command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened to the effect control board 12. For this reason, when the door opening designation command is received from the main board 11, it can be determined that the door opening detection switch is on.

  If the door opening detection switch is on (S61; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 300 is operating (S62). For example, if the first movable body 300 is at the origin position, it is determined that it is not in operation, and if it is not at the origin position, it is determined that it is in operation. If the first movable body 300 is operating (S62; Yes), a door opening notification (first opening notification) at the time of the movable body operation is executed (S63). On the other hand, if the first movable body 300 is not in operation (S62; No), a normal door opening notification (second opening notification) is executed (S65). The door opening notification during the operation of the movable body is different from the normal door opening notification. For example, the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body is configured such that the notification sound is louder than the normal door opening notification or the notification image and the notification light emission are conspicuous. In addition, the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body is a notification that the movable object is in operation (for example, a notification image such as “Moveable object is in operation!” Or “Be careful about the moving object in operation!”) The content may be output as a voice, etc.), and the door opening notification at the normal time may not be so.

  Thus, if it is 1st open | release alert | report, it can alert | report that it is open | release of the opening-and-closing frame 50 in operation | movement of the 1st movable body 300, and it will open | release the opening-and-closing frame 50 in consideration of the 1st movable body 300 in operation | movement. Can be dealt with. Further, when the second opening notification is made, it can be notified that the opening / closing frame 50 is open when the first movable body 300 is not operating, and the opening / closing frame 50 is dealt with without worrying about the first movable body 300. can do. For this reason, when the opening notification of the opening / closing frame 50 is made, it is possible to execute an appropriate treatment according to the presence or absence of the operation of the first movable body 300. In addition, it is good also as the same alerting | reporting, without distinguishing the door open alert | report at the time of movable body operation | movement, and the door open alert | report at the time of normal.

  After S63, the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted (S64). For example, the operation of the first movable body 300 is stopped. When the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is detected during the operation of the first movable body 300, the operation of the first movable body 300 is limited, and therefore the first movable body 300 and the second transmission body 260 can be prevented from being damaged. .

  Note that, as an example of restricting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S64), control for moving the first movable body 300 to the standby position may be performed. According to this, for example, when the first control or the second control is executed in the movable body effect, an operation abnormality of the first movable body 300 occurs, and the first movable body 300 is moved to the first effect position or the like. Even when it is necessary to perform maintenance by opening the opening / closing frame 50, such as when the movement of the opening / closing frame 50 is stopped due to the movement of the game or the ball is clogged in the game area 10, the first time when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened. Since the movable body 300 is retracted toward a position where the movable body 300 does not contact the rear transmission plate 261 (for example, a standby position), the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, even when the game ball staying in a daisy chain is dropped due to clogged balls when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened, the first control causes the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, that is, the front side of the game area 10. Since the moving first movable body 300 is retracted to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the first movable body 300. Therefore, the first movable body 300 is caused to collide with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged or bouncing due to a collision with the first movable body 300 and entering the back side of the board plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board board 200.

  On the other hand, when the door opening detection switch is not on (S61; No), the process ends after S64 or after S65.

(Command analysis processing)
In the command analysis process, the reception command (the effect control command received by the effect control board 12) stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and which effect control the received command is. Whether the command is specified or not is processed according to the specified effect control command.

  FIG. 44 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis process and the processing content performed in the command analysis process corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the drawing are provided in the RAM 122. “Set” for a flag means that the flag is turned on. The state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area may be reset or deleted at an appropriate timing. When an addition designation command for the special figure hold memory number or a subtraction designation command for the special figure hold memory number is received, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 5D or the second hold memory display area 5U of the effect display device 5A is received accordingly. The number of images may be increased or decreased.

(Production control process)
The effect control CPU 120 performs start setting for starting execution of various effects in the effect control process (effect start setting), effect operation control for executing the effect that has been set to start, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter, and the like described below are provided in the RAM 122.

  The production start setting includes, for example, setting the production control pattern as a usage pattern in the RAM 122 and setting an initial value corresponding to the production control pattern set in the process timer. The timer value of the process timer is subtracted at a predetermined timing (at the start of the effect control process processing, at the time of effect operation control described later, etc.) every time a timer interrupt occurs after setting the initial value. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects (including variable display of effect symbols), and is associated with a process timer determination value to be compared with the timer value of the process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process data including the produced production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lighting control data, etc.) and an end code. Data constituting the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

  The effect operation control is a control for executing an effect based on the effect control pattern set in the effect start setting. Specifically, the display control command according to the display control data among the presentation control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer is transmitted to the display control unit 123 to display the presentation. Effects are displayed on the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, driving control commands according to the drive control data are transmitted to the display device drive mechanism 900 to drive the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, or according to the audio control data. A sound signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or an illumination signal according to the lighting control data is transmitted to the LED control board 14 to turn on / off the effect LED 9. And control to execute the production. Execution of various effects is realized by repeatedly performing the effect operation control every time the timer interruption occurs.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 executes one of S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  Next, the processing of S170 to S175 will be described. The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command or the like from the main board 11 has been received. The determination may be made based on whether or not the command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, for example. If the command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and this process ends. If the command has not been received, this process ends.

  The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a finalized effect symbol as a variable effect display result of the effect symbol (S321). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the final stop based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the design. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the production symbol is not changed to the reach state, but the fixed production symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “losing”. " When the variable display content is “reach (lost)”, after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed effect symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “lost”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the effect control CPU 120 uses the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R to display different (unmatched) effect symbols as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left determined symbol determination table prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to the determined effect symbol, the left determined effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right confirmed effect symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol by setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined effect symbols, the medium determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the same (matching) effect symbols in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table prepared in advance and stored in the ROM 121. By referencing, for example, an effect symbol with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A among the confirmed effect symbols. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed effect symbols, the medium determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. For example, when the confirmed effect symbol becomes a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed effect symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol, an arbitrary value (for example, “ 1)) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium finalized effect symbol, so that the finalized symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium finalized effect symbol, a difference (symbol difference) between the symbol number of the left finalized effect symbol and the right finalized effect symbol may be determined, and the medium finalized effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (coincident) effect symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A, An effect symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in line with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the probable design (for example, the design to be shown) and the probability variation design (for example, the design for producing odd numbers) is to be the finalized design. In the jackpot promotion effect, a combination of performance symbols (non-probable variation jackpot combination) that recalls a big hit but does not recall a probable change state in the effect display device 5A is temporarily stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. This is an effect of notifying whether or not the state is surely changed at the end of.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the definite effect design is determined from among a plurality of types of probability change symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)”, when it is determined to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the finalized effect symbol is determined from the plural types of normal symbols. Thereby, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed effect symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  After the process of S321, a change effect setting process for performing execution setting of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. You may do it.

  After the process of S322, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special-figure change effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and uses it as the use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses pattern Set as.

  After the process of S323, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body effect setting process (S323A) for operating the movable body in the case of the reach effect of Super Reach A, for example.

  In the movable body effect setting process shown in FIG. 48A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the super reach A is based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S501). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the super reach A (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect is determined (S502). Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determination table shown in FIG. It is used to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern if it is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 48B, in the case of the super reach A (lack) fluctuation pattern, “no execution” is 15%, “execution is” and “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 29). ) ”Is determined with a probability of 55%, and with“ execution performed ”, the probability of“ operation pattern PTA-2 (second operation mode shown in FIG. 30 after becoming the first operation mode shown in FIG. 29) ”is 30%. Determined by On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is determined with a probability of 10%, “execution is performed” and “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation form)” is determined with a probability of 20%. Then, “execution is performed” and “operation pattern PTA-2 (second operation mode after the first operation mode)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body effect of “motion pattern PTA-2 (second motion mode after the first motion mode)” is greater than in the case of the super reach A (lack) variation pattern. It is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 operates in the second operation mode shown in FIG. 30 can have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, since “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 29)” is executed, the first movable body 300 is shown in FIG. The movable body effect that operates in the operation mode can also have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Here, the operation pattern PTA-2 performs the second operation mode after the first operation mode, but is not limited thereto. For example, the operation pattern PTA-2 may perform only the second operation mode shown in FIG.

  Note that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the variation pattern of the super reach A but also in the variation pattern of the super reach B. The variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, a determination ratio may be set such that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After the process of S502 shown in FIG. 48A, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined (S503). If it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the ON state (S504). After the process of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTA-1 or PTA-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (S501; No), or when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

  Returning to FIG. 47, following the processing of S323A, the CPU 120 for effect control is provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example. The initial value of the production control process timer is set (S324). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of an effect design etc. is performed on the screen of effect display apparatus 5A (S325). At this time, for example, a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Thus, the variation of the effect symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the effect display device 5A.

  After the process of S325, the first hold display in the first hold storage display area 5D, the second hold display in the second hold storage display area 5U, and the like are updated in response to the start of variable display of the effect symbols. To make the setting (S326). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), the display portion (the leftmost display portion) corresponding to the hold number “1” in the first hold storage display area 5D is erased (digested). The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the second hold storage display area 5U. At the same time, the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” is moved (shifted) to the right one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the variable display processing in S <b> 172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (S341). . As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed. When the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). ). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of S323 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the LED control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect LED 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off. Or what is necessary is just to be able to perform a pending | holding display change effect in a predetermined production device by combining some or all of these.

  When it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No), after the process of S343, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (S346). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that it is the reach production period (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach production is performed (S347). After the processing of S347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movable object effect flag is on (S347A). If the movable body effect flag is on (S347A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation valid period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A or the like is valid (S347B). If it is the operation valid period (S347B; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stick controller 31A has been operated (S347C). When the stick controller 31A is operated (S347C; Yes), the operation flag is set to an on state (S347D). When it is determined in S347B that the operation is not valid (S347B; No), or when it is determined in S347C that there is no operation of the stick controller 31A (S347C; No), after the process of S347D, it is movable. It is determined whether it is a body effect period (S347E). When it is a movable body production period (S347E; Yes), it is determined whether an operation flag is ON (S347F). When the operation flag is on (S347F; Yes), a movable body effect execution process is performed (S347G). If the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), an alternative effect execution process is performed in place of the movable object effect (S347H). Even when the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), the movable body effect execution process may be performed (S347G).

  When it is determined that the movable body effect flag is not ON in S347A (S347A; No), when it is determined that the movable body effect period is not determined in S347E (S347E; No), after the processing of S347G, After the processing of S347H, the effect control CPU 120, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Control is executed to execute (S348).

  If the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (S349; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the apparatus waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do. When the symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, the display result in the variable display of the effect symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. A control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined effect symbol) is performed (S350). In the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. Then, after the process of S350, a predetermined time is set in advance as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (S351). After the process of S351, the movable body effect flag and the operation flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S352), and then the effect process during variable display is ended.

  The special figure waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current elapsed time since the last stop symbol is derived and displayed (measured with a predetermined timer) has reached a preset hit start designation command reception waiting time. However, when the hit start designation command is received when the hit is not reached (when the hit start designation command reception flag is ON), the big hit effect (from the start of the fanfare executed in the big hit gaming state to before the ending) Start setting (such as setting of the production control pattern). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, and this process is terminated. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not been reached and no hit start designation command has been received, this processing is terminated. If the current elapsed time has reached the waiting time, the variable display result of the special figure game is determined to be “lost”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, and this process is terminated. Since the current elapsed time has not reached the waiting time and the waiting start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  The hitting process in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and displays effect images based on the set contents on the screen of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, Operating the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and commands (lighting signals) to the LED control board 14 ) Is used to control various production operations during a predetermined period in which the grand prize winning door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on / off the production LED 9. In the hit process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”, and is a process for executing the ending at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the ending process, display control is performed in the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, an example of a composite effect including a movable body effect and a display device effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50A to 50F are explanatory views showing an example of the flow of the composite effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), for example, after the reach state is established during a predetermined symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are connected to the effect display device 5A. It moves so that it may approach the position of the front side, and the display which shows having developed into the super reach effect etc. is performed on the effect display apparatuses 5X and 5Y.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50C, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y come into contact with each other to form one display unit, and the operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the operating means on the display unit. An image is displayed.

  When the player operates the operation means during the operation reception period of the operation means, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the standby position and the movable body effect in the present embodiment. When the start condition is satisfied, the movable body effect is executed, and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R perform the rendering operation, and the movable body unit changes from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode. To change. At this time, each movable body is superimposed in front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, so that the display unit of the effect display device 5A is difficult to see from the player.

  When the first operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50E, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are housed, and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body 300 The four movable bodies 600L and 600R perform a production operation, and the movable body unit changes from the first operation form to the second operation form. Also at this time, each movable body is superimposed in front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult for the player to see. Further, during execution of the movable body effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 50D, when the movable body unit changes from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode, FIG. In the case of changing to the second operation mode as shown in (E), the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device) The light emitting component (LED) of 6B, at least one of the light emitting components (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light, or lower brightness than when the movable body effect is not executed. The light is emitted. Thereby, a movable body effect can be made conspicuous and a player can be watched at a movable body effect. Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

  Next, when the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the storage operation of the first movable body 300 and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R is executed, and the movable body effect ends. Then, a super reach effect is executed, and after the super reach effect is executed, for example, in the case of a big hit, a symbol indicating a big hit (for example, 7-7-7) is displayed on the effect display device 5A. The effect images (for example, characters and characters) are displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the window 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the first movable body 300 provided so as to be operable, and the first movable body 300 are controlled. The window 51 is arranged closer to the game area 10 than the first transparent body 250 and the hole 270 is formed. At least a part of the first movable body 300 enters the space S formed between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 through the hole portion 270. The first movable body 300 can execute the second operation of moving to the first effect position that enters between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. That is, the first movable body 300 can enter the first presentation position shown in FIG. 35 or 36 from the first standby position (origin position) shown in FIG. 34 at a stretch, and provides a surprising movable body presentation. be able to. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, acceleration advance means for accelerating the first movable body 300 between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 (with the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700). Therefore, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced along the rail 701 of the base member 700 obliquely downward. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  For example, since the rail 701 of the base member 700 is a guide member having an obliquely downward linear path (downward guide path portion), the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 faces downward along the obliquely downward rail 701. By being guided, the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced to the second position P2. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player. A part of the rail 701 may have a part other than downward.

  Further, the first movable body 300 is a first standby position (see FIG. 34) that is a position that does not overlap the effect display device 5A (display means) (or may be a position that partially overlaps the display means). It is possible to operate from the origin position) to the first effect position shown in FIG. 35 or FIG. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position suddenly appears at the first performance position. Can give you a surprise. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control has the first movable body 300 in the first standby position, with a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. After executing the first control to move to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side relative to the rear transmission plate 261, and after executing the first control, a predetermined part (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 The first protrusion 303 that is a part of the main body 302 is moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control, or after executing the first control. The second protrusion 304, which is a part of a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the first control, is moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control. Second control to be performed can be performed. According to this configuration, after performing the first control to move the first movable body 300 toward the first transmission body 250, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the main body 302 (for example, the first protrusion 303 or the second protrusion). By performing the second control to move the protrusion 304) in a direction (front upper direction) different from the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control on the first transmission body 250 side than the second transmission body 260. Since the player can give an impact, the effect of the production can be improved.

  Specifically, after performing the first control as well as the first control for moving the first movable body 300 toward the first transmission body 250, the direction is different from the moving direction (front downward direction) in the first control. By performing the second control to move in the (front-upward direction), a part of the main body 302 (for example, the first protrusion 303 or the second protrusion 304) is expanded and the first movable body 300 is expanded. Because it seems to be, it can have an impact on the player.

  Further, the rear transmission plate 261 is disposed to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down between the game board surface 200A and forms a flow area of the game ball between the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole 270 is formed at a position corresponding to an effect area (opening 2 c formed on the board surface plate 200) that does not correspond to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10. That is, since it is necessary to secure a flow-down area of the game ball, there is a limit to enlarge the hole 270, and in order to pass the first movable body 300 through the hole 270, the first movable body 300 is It cannot be made larger than the hole 270.

  Therefore, after performing the first control to move the first movable body 300 to the front side as in the present invention, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the main body 302 (for example, the first protrusion 303 or the second protrusion 304). ) Is moved in a direction (front upper direction) different from the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmission body 260, thereby making the hole 270 more than necessary. A part of the main body 302 is expanded when the first movable body 300 is viewed from the front (player side) at a position closer to the player on the front side than the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the size. Therefore, the player can provide a powerful presentation.

  In the second control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302, in the moving direction (front and lower) in the first control. Move in a direction (front-up direction) that intersects the direction. By doing in this way, the movement (protrusion operation | movement) of the 1st protrusion part 303 and the 2nd protrusion part 304 of the 1st movable body 300 in 2nd control can be shown suitably.

  In the second control, the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302, intersect the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. The first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 are disposed around the main body 302 when viewed from the front in order to move in the direction and the front upward direction that is along the front transmission plate 251. Since it can be expanded and moved toward the player side, more powerful effects can be provided.

  Since the first movable body 300 moves in the opposite direction (front side) to the game area 10 in the second control, that is, gradually moves forward in the first control and the second control, it has a powerful effect. It can be performed.

  In addition, the first movable body 300 moves forward while descending forward and downward from the first standby position toward the first effect position by the first control, so that the player side is more than the one that moves horizontally. You can make it easier to understand how you are moving towards Further, since not only the surface A but the surface B of the main body 302 can be visually recognized when moving forward, the main body 302 can be shown larger.

  The second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R that support the first movable body 300 in the first operation mode, and the fourth movable body 600L that supports the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode. , 600R and the like. By doing so, the posture of the first movable body 300 during and after the operation can be stabilized.

  More specifically, the first movable body 300 is operably supported by a base member 700 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and moves to the front side via the board surface plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since the moving distance is longer than that of a conventional movable body that moves only to the front of the rear transmission plate 261, it may be supported stably via a guide rail or the like. If a guide rail or the like is provided, the visibility may be lowered, for example, when the movable body effect is not executed, the guide rail or the like makes it difficult to see a part of the game area 10 behind. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of the game area 10 during the non-execution of the movable body effect, it is possible to prevent the game area 10 from being deteriorated by being supported only by the other fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R and the like. it can.

  Further, the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L, 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 includes After performing one control, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, and the like can be controlled to move together in the first movable body 300. By doing so, the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, etc.) support each other by combining. Therefore, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

  Specifically, in the first operation form and the second operation form of the movable body unit, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R different from the first movable body 300 are provided. Since the first movable body 300 is disposed so as to come into contact with or close to the periphery of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 shakes after the projecting operation of the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304 or after the projecting operation. Even so, they can support each other and stabilize their posture.

  Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first operation mode, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode. The second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the rear side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. By doing in this way, when the 1st movable body 300 and the 2nd movable body (for example, 2nd movable body 400, 3rd movable body 500L, 500R, 4th movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) were united. Since the first movable body 300 in the first control is located at a different position in the moving direction (front-rear direction), a sense of depth can be generated.

  Moreover, the window part 51 can open and close the game area | region 10 (refer FIG. 3), and the 1st movable body 300 does not contact the 2nd permeation | transmission body 260, when opening and closing the window part 51 (refer FIG. 39). By doing in this way, damage to the 1st movable body 300 or the 2nd penetration body 260 can be prevented.

  Specifically, the front part of the first movable body 300 (the part disposed closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the hole 270 in the closed state of the opening / closing frame 50) is within the rotation region Z of the hole 270. Therefore, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the rear transmission plate 261 does not contact the first movable body 300. According to this, for example, during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, an operation error or the like occurs and the first movable body 300 remains stopped at the first effect position. Even when it is necessary to perform maintenance by opening the opening / closing frame 50, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 are damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable body 300 is disposed in the rotation region Z of the hole 270 even when the first control or the second control is being performed in the movable body effect. Although the embodiment in which the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the plate 261 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second transmitting body is not contacted when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed. Just do it.

  Further, the first movable body 300 is provided with light emitting means (for example, movable body LED 350A, movable body LED 350B, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR) that can irradiate light other than the first transmission body 250 after performing the first control. , And movable body LEDs 350DL, 350DR, etc.). In this way, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

  Specifically, not only the moving effect of the first movable body 300 but also the light emitting effects of the movable body LED 350A, the movable body LED 350B, the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR, and the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR can be performed. Can appeal.

  In addition, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming the gaming area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window 51 provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50 The display LED 9 provided in a region other than the door 51 includes an effect LED 9 as an opening / closing door-side light emitting component, and an effect control CPU 120 as light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a first movable body. 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R can change the light emission mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emission modes. . By doing in this way, the movement of the 1st movable body 300 can be produced suitably.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to cause the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode and then to emit light in the second light emission mode having a lower luminance than the first light emission mode. By doing in this way, the fall of transparency of the 1st movable body 300 grade | etc., Can be suppressed.

  Specifically, after performing the first control in the first light emission mode, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode (second control), in the second light emission mode having a lower luminance than the first light emission mode. In order to emit light, halation or the like occurs due to the light of the production LED 9 during the second control, which is the production in which the first movable body 300 appears to expand, and the reduction in the visibility of each movable body can be suppressed. .

  In addition, a gaming machine frame 3 having a gaming board 2 for forming the gaming area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window 51 provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50 The display LED 9 is provided in a region other than the door 51 and includes an effect LED 9 as an opening / closing door side light-emitting component, and an effect control CPU 120 as light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9. It is provided so that light can be irradiated toward the first movable body 300 after being broken. By doing in this way, the 1st movable body 300 can be made conspicuous with light.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications are possible (the above configuration may be deleted). Below, the modification of the said embodiment is shown. You may combine at least one part about each of the following modification.

  In the above embodiment, the hole 270 is formed in the second transmission body 260, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second transmitting body 260 may be formed with a cutout portion having a size that allows the first movable body 300 to enter.

(Modification 5)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 is moved obliquely downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (arrow 1 in FIGS. 31 and 34). However, the present invention is not limited to this. As in Modification 5 shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 includes a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and a first operation ACT1. The second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 that enters between the transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be executable. That is, the first movable body 300 may be operated in two stages as shown in FIG. For example, the first movable body 300 moves from the first standby position (origin position P0) that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 to the first position P1 immediately below the first operation ACT1 ( For example, movement in the drooping direction is possible. Further, the first movable body 300 enters the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 from the first position P1 toward the player side. A second operation ACT2 (for example, movement in the horizontal direction) that operates at two positions P2 is possible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is an origin position that is a position that is not superimposed on the effect display device 5A (display means) (or may be a position that is partially superimposed on the display means). Operation from P0 to the first position P1 or the second position P2 is possible. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 suddenly appears at the first position P1 or the second position P2. Will give the player a surprise. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the first movable body 300 may have different operation speeds between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed at the first speed V1. The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed at the second speed V2. The operation speed (second speed V2) of the second operation ACT2 is higher than the operation speed (first speed V1) of the first operation ACT1. For example, the first speeds V1 and V2 may be the maximum speed and the average speed. Specifically, in the process of S502 of Modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and determines the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determination shown in FIG. 52 (A). Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern in the case of execution may be determined using the table.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, in the case of the super reach A (lack) fluctuation pattern, “No execution” is 15%, and “Execution” is “First operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)”. "Is determined with a probability of 55%, and" with execution "," second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) "is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is 20%. The “second execution pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” than in the case of the super reach A (loss) variation pattern. The production is easy to be executed, and the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation with respect to the movable body production in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, since the “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. The movable body effect that executes ACT1 can also have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved.

  According to the modified example 5, the first movable body 300 includes a first operation ACT1 that operates at the first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250. A second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transmission body 260 and the second transmission body 260 can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 where the first movable body 250 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful against the player. Production can be provided. Further, the operation speed differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  For example, the operation speed (second speed V2) of the second operation ACT2 is greater than the operation speed (first speed V1) of the first operation ACT1. For this reason, since the operation speed of the second position P2 close to the player is faster than the operation speed of the first position P1 far from the player, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

  The operation speed (second speed V2) of the second operation ACT2 may be smaller than the operation speed (first speed V1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, since the operation speed when the first movable body 300 enters through the hole 270 or the notch of the rear transmission plate 261 is slow, the vibration of the first movable body 300 in the second operation ACT2 (Vibration in a direction different from the traveling direction) is reduced, and the first movable body 300 can be prevented from contacting the hole 270 or the notch. For this reason, failure due to the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 can be reduced.

  Note that at least one of the operation speed, the operation range, the operation path, and the operation direction may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. In the fifth modification, the operation speed is different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 as shown in FIG. 52, and the operation is performed between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 as shown in FIG. The direction is also different. For example, the operation range of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than that of the first operation ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation path, the second operation ACT2 may have a larger operation path than the first operation ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation direction, the second operation ACT2 may have a larger operation path than the first operation ACT1, or may be made smaller.

  In addition, as in another example 1 shown in FIG. 52 (B), the first movable body 300 includes light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL,...) Associated with operations in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) may have different light emission modes. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed in the first light emission mode (for example, luminance I1). The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed in the second light emission mode (for example, luminance I2). The luminance I2 of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the luminance I1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of another example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and determines the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determination shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern in the case of execution may be determined using the table.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), in the case of the super reach A (lack) fluctuation pattern, “No execution” is 15% and “Execution” is “First operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)”. ”Is determined with a probability of 55%, and“ execution is performed ”and“ second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) ”is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is 20%. The “second execution pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of “second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” than in the case of the super reach A (loss) variation pattern. The production is easy to be executed, and the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation with respect to the movable body production in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, since the “first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. The movable body effect that executes ACT1 can also have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved.

  According to another example 1, the first movable body 300 includes a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250. A second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transmission body 260 and the second transmission body 260 can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 where the first movable body 250 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful against the player. Production can be provided. Further, the light emission means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) associated with the operation differ between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  For example, the second light emission mode (for example, luminance I2) of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the first light emission mode (for example, luminance I1) of the first operation ACT1. For this reason, the glare when the 1st movable body 300 approaches the player side can be reduced.

  Note that the second light emission mode (for example, luminance I2) of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than the first light emission mode (for example, luminance I1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, the first movable body 300 can be more dazzling when approaching the player side, and a light emitting effect with impact can be provided.

  In another example, the first light emitting means of the first movable body 300 (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) have different luminance as the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode. , At least one of the light amount, the emission color, the blinking interval, the emission sequence (for example, the order in which the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR are lit) may be different.

  Further, as in another example 2 shown in FIG. 52C, the first movable body 300 includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) associated with operations in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The production sound may be different. In the first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1), the effect sound in the first effect sound mode (for example, the volume Vo1) is output. In the second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2), the effect sound in the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) is output. The volume Vo2 of the second operation ACT2 is larger than the volume Vo1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the processing of S502 of another example 2, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and determines the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determination shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern in the case of execution may be determined using the table.

  As shown in FIG. 52C, in the case of the super reach A (lack) fluctuation pattern, “No execution” is 15%, “Execution” is “First operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” ”Is determined with a probability of 55%, and“ execution is performed ”and“ second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) ”is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is 20%. The “second execution pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of “second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” than in the case of the super reach A (loss) variation pattern. The production is easy to be executed, and the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation with respect to the movable body production in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, since the “first operation pattern PTC-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. The movable body effect that executes ACT1 can also have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved.

  According to another example 2, the first movable body 300 includes a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250. A second operation ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 that enters between the second transmission body 260 and the second transmission body 260 can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 where the first movable body 250 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful against the player. Production can be provided. Further, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 have different production sounds (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  For example, it is assumed that the effect sound in the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 is larger than the effect sound in the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. For this reason, the 2nd operation close to the player of the 1st movable body 300 can be excited by a production sound. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

  The effect sound in the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 may be smaller than the effect sound in the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 can be focused by reducing the effect of the second sound close to the player of the first movable body 300. For example, the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 can be watched by the silence effect. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

  In the second example, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 are different in the volume of the effect sound accompanying the operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 may be different in at least one of the volume, pitch, tempo, music, melody, etc. of the production sound accompanying the operation. For example, as an example in which the music is different, the first effect sound mode of the first action ACT1 is, for example, the music A is played at a predetermined volume, and the second effect sound mode of the second action ACT2 is, for example, the music B is the predetermined volume (music (Same volume as in A)). In addition, as an example in which the music and the volume are different, for example, the first effect sound mode of the first action ACT1 is, for example, the song A is played at the first volume, and the second effect sound mode of the second action ACT2 is, for example, the song B is the second effect sound. You may make it reproduce | regenerate with a sound volume (a sound volume different from the 1st sound volume at the time of the music A).

  As shown in FIGS. 52A to 52C, the first movable body 300 performs the second operation ACT2 after executing the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 after executing the first operation ACT1. In some cases, the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 have different expectation levels (for example, big hit expectation degrees) controlled to be advantageous, so that the movable body effect can be achieved. A player can be watched. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved. For example, when the second action ACT2 has a higher expectation than the first action ACT1, coupled with the second action ACT2 being an action effect at a position closer to the player than the first action ACT1, The effect of the movable body effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as the announcement effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variation display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 53A, various announcement effects can be executed at a plurality of timings from the variation start to the variation stop. It has become. These notice effects include a reach notice that indicates whether or not to reach, a reach advance notice that suggests whether or not to develop an advantageous reach, and a jackpot notice effect that indicates the possibility of a big hit. You may make it perform the movable body effect of the said embodiment and modification in these notification effects.

  As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of reaching the reach advance, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data. And the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53B may be used to determine the operation pattern of the movable body effect. It should be noted that whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern in the case of execution may be determined. As shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the case of the super reach variation pattern, “only the first operation ACT1” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1” has a probability of 70%. Determined by In the case of development to super reach, the movable body effect of “second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1” is easier to be executed than the movable body effect of “first operation ACT1 only”. Can improve the fun of gaming.

  As the movable body effect at the time of reach advance notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (A1), the normal reach effect is started, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, when the first action ACT1 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53 (B), as shown in FIG. 54 (A2), the first The movable body 300 performs the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). When the second motion ACT2 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 53 (B), after the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 54 (A2) performs the first motion ACT1, As shown in FIG. 54 (A3), the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 advances to the second position P2 toward the player side) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (A4), the super reach development is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. In the case of only the first operation ACT1, it may not be developed into super reach. In addition, the determination example shown in FIG. 53B may be provided with a reach development pattern indicating reach development without the first movable body 300 being operated.

  As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and The motion pattern of the movable body effect may be determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. In the case of the super reach A (losing) variation pattern, the movable body effect is not executed. That is, the first movable body 300 does not operate and remains at the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body effect of “second operation ACT2 after first operation ACT1” is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, if the first movable body 300 performs the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1, the second stage ACT2 can have a big expectation, and if the first movable body 300 operates ( The second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1) can be known to be a big hit (a big hit confirmation notice), and the fun of the game is improved.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (B1), the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice starts a super reach effect, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed in the turn effect. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 54 (B2), the first movable body 300 is moved to the first action ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 is moved from the origin position P0 to the first position P1. Move). In the case of the super reach shown in FIG. 53C, the first movable body 300 is operated in the second action ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 51 is a game) as shown in FIG. The second position P2 is advanced toward the user side). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (B4), a big hit is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of super reach (losing) shown in FIG. 53 (C), the first movable body 300 does not operate, and as shown in FIG. 54 (B5), the first movable body 300 stops at the origin position P0. The display is lost. That is, in the movable body effect at the time of jackpot notice, it can be known that if the first movable body 300 operates (second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1), it will be a big hit (big hit confirmation notice).

  In FIG. 54 (B1), the stick controller 31A is operated when the first movable body 300 is at the origin position P0. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (B2), the first movable body 300 is in the first position. After moving to P1, an operation effect that executes the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 based on the operation of the stick controller 31A may be executable. For example, “no operation” shown in FIG. 53C may be “first operation only”. In this case, it is possible to provide an operation effect that the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 based on the detection of the player's operation. In other words, the player can watch whether the first movable body 300 at the first position P1 moves to the second position P2, and the player can participate in the game. Can be made.

  Further, an execution ratio in which only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the first timing and the second timing in the variable display (variable display), and an execution ratio in which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1. May be different. For example, only the first action ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach advance notice shown in FIG. 53 (A) and the execution timing (second timing) of the big hit notice shown in FIG. 53 (A). The execution rate is different from the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the first operation ACT1 is executed. In this case, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the execution rates may be different at a plurality of timings in a predetermined notice (for example, reach advance notice).

(Modification 6A)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 is moved obliquely downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIG. 34). However, it is not limited to this. As in Modification 6A shown in FIG. 55, the first movable body 300 may be operated from the origin position P0 to the second position P2 along the concave arcuate path RT1, or may be operated along the convex arcuate path RT2. May be. That is, it is only necessary that the downward guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., not shown) of the first movable body 300 is formed in a convex or concave downward arc path. According to the modified example 6A, the first movable body 300 can be guided by a downward arc-shaped route, and the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced downward. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

(Modification 6B)
56, after the first movable body 300 operates from the origin position P0 to the first position P1, the first movable body 300 is recessed at the first position P1 and the second position P2. It may be possible to swing along the arcuate path RT3. In other words, the swing guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., not shown) of the first movable body 300 only needs to be formed in a concave arc path. According to the modified example 6B, since the first movable body 300 can swing along the concave arcuate path RT3, a movable body swing effect in which the first movable body 300 is advanced and retracted is provided. be able to. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

(Modification 6C)
Further, as in Modification 6C shown in FIG. 57, the first movable body 300 can advance to an intermediate position PS1 of the concave arcuate path RT1 and an advance position PS2 advanced from the intermediate position PS1. The degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to be in an advantageous state is different between the case where the movable body 300 advances to the midway position PS1 and the case where the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS2. Also good. According to the modified example 6C, the expected degree of control (for example, big hit) when the first movable body 300 is advanced to the midway position PS1 and when the first movable body 300 is advanced to the advanced position PS2. Since the degree of expectation and the like are different, the player can be watched for the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved. For example, when the advancement position PS2 is higher in expectation than the midway position PS1, the advancement position PS2 is combined with the action effect at the position closer to the player than the midway position PS1. The effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 6D)
58, the window portion 51 includes wall portions WL and WR (partition plates) extending in a direction connecting the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. The wall portions WL and WR may be erected on at least one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be increased. The wall portions WL and WR may be connected by the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window 51 can be further increased. In particular, in the window part 51 having the space part S into which the first movable body 300 can enter, such strength improvement is useful. Downward linear or arcuate guide holes WL1 and WR1 (or may be guide grooves) for guiding the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 are formed in the walls WL and WR, respectively. . Projecting bar portions BP projecting from the left side surface and the right side surface of the first movable body 300 can be inserted into the guide holes WL1, WR1 of the wall portions WL, WR. For this reason, the wall portions WL and WR not only increase the strength of the window portion 51 but also reduce the vibration of the first movable body 300 operating in the second position P2 in the vertical direction. Supports stably.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the rail 701 advances toward the hole 270, but does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, but the rail 701. The (guide member) may enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 through the hole 270. According to this, since the rail 701 can advance toward the hole portion 270 or the cutout portion, the first movable body 300 is accelerated by the advanced rail 701 and the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are separated. You can advance in between. For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

  Further, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be restricted based on the detection of the opening / closing frame 50 being opened by the door opening detection switch. According to this, damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transmission body 260 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the first protrusion 303 is changed to the first protrusion state so as to spread around the main body 302 by the execution of the second control, the first protrusion 303 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The protrusion 303 protrudes out of the area corresponding to the hole 270, that is, the game ball does not protrude to the game area 10 side, so that the first protrusion 303 does not hinder the viewing of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Modification 7 of FIG. 59, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 corresponds to the game area 10 of the game ball. 60, or at least part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 may be moved to an area corresponding to the game area 10 of the game ball, as shown in Modification 8 of FIG. The main body 302 is entirely overlapped It may be moved.

(Modification 7)
Here, Modification 7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit according to the seventh modification. As shown in FIG. 59, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the movable portions 306L and 306R are movable in the left-right direction to a predetermined portion located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. In the case where it is provided, when these movable parts 306L and 306R are respectively moved outward, at least a part of these movable parts 306L and 306R is outside the area corresponding to the hole part 270. You may make it overlap in the position corresponding to 10.

(Modification 8)
A modification 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit according to Modification 8. As shown in FIG. 60, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the protrusions 307L and 307R protrude from the main body portion 302 at predetermined portions located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. A first movable body including the main body 302 so that at least a part of the protrusions 307L and 307R overlaps with a position corresponding to the game area 10 outside the area corresponding to the hole 270. The entire 300 may be moved in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

  In the embodiment, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position is arranged such that the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302 is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although the form which can be moved to the front side until it is located on the transmission plate 251 side is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the non-movable body provided on the base portion so as not to operate is illustrated. The rear transmission plate 261 may be provided so as to be positioned closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. In addition, in this case, not only the movable body used for the movable body effect but also, for example, at least a part of the guide path capable of guiding the game ball through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 through the rear transmission plate 261. You may provide so that it may be located in the front transmission board 251 side rather than.

  For example, the warp path 800 as an example of the guide path is a guide path that guides a game ball flowing down the game area 10 to a predetermined area (for example, a stage, a winning opening, etc.). In addition to the passage 800, a winning passage for guiding a winning ball that has entered the winning area, a ball passage for production, or the like may be used.

(Modification 9)
Here, Modification 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 61A is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a fixed ball passage according to the modification 9, and FIGS. 61B and 61C are vertical cross-sectional views showing a movable ball passage according to the modification 7. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), a hole formed in a part of a passage forming member 801 made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material that forms a warp passage 800 partially bent forward is formed in a rear transmission plate 261. The warp passage 800 is inserted into the portion 271 from the back side, and a part of the warp passage 800 is positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole portion 271.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position near the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801, so that the interest of the game is improved. .

  Further, a passage forming member made of a synthetic resin material having translucency that forms a first warp passage 800A for causing the game ball to flow linearly and a second warp passage 800B for causing the game ball to meander and flow downward. A part of 801 is provided to be movable back and forth between a first passage position (see FIG. 61B) and a second passage position ahead of the first passage position (see FIG. 61C). When moved to the second passage position, at least a part of the second warp passage 800B may be positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through a hole portion 271 formed in the rear transmission plate 261.

  By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position near the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801, so that the interest of the game is improved. .

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the one part of the main-body part 302 which moves by 2nd control illustrated the form which is the 1st protrusion part 303 and the 2nd protrusion part 304 which protrude from the inside of the main-body part 302, this form was illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and in the movable body, a portion (predetermined portion) or a part thereof located on the first transmission body side with respect to the second transmission body through the hole by the first control is a second part. It is only necessary to move in a direction different from the moving direction in the first control in the control. That is, the part that operates in the second control is not limited to the part that performs the protruding operation, and may be a part that can be moved by slide movement or rotation. Moreover, if the moving direction of the predetermined part of the movable body is different from the moving direction of the movable body in the first control, it can be freely changed, for example, left and right, up and down, and oblique directions.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, only a predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302 is positioned on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire first movable body 300 may be positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable body 300 which is an example of a movable body illustrated the form which slides forward and downward toward a 1st production position from a 1st stand-by position, this invention corresponds to this. It is not limited, and it may move horizontally from the first standby position toward the first effect position, or may move in the front upper, front left, front right, etc. That is, it is only necessary to be provided so as to be movable from the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 toward the front side. Moreover, as long as it moves to the front side, it may move to the front side by rotation instead of sliding.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable body 300 which is an example of a movable body illustrated the form arrange | positioned so that the front part may be located in the front side rather than the rear transmission board 261 in the 1st standby position. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first standby position may be disposed so that the entirety is located behind the rear transmission plate 261.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when only the 1st movable body 300 moved to the 1st production position, the predetermined part of the main-body part 302 illustrated the form located in the front side rather than the rear transmission board 261, but this invention Is not limited to this, and when a plurality of movable bodies such as the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the effect position, the predetermined portion is rear-transmitted. It may be positioned on the front side of the plate 261.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable body 300 illustrated the form arrange | positioned in the upper position of 5 A of presentation display apparatuses, this invention is not limited to this, The arrangement position of a movable body Can be arbitrarily changed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as an example of the movable body which operate | moves so that a predetermined part may be located in front of the rear transmission board 261 when it moves to a production | presentation position, the 1st movable body which is a movable tool for production | presentation Although 300 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, etc. are moved to the effect position, the predetermined portion May be applied as a movable body that operates so as to be positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261, or may be a movable body for production provided separately from these. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the first reserved display device are not limited to the effect movable accessories connected to the effect control board 12 in this way. Even if various display devices connected to the main board 11 such as 25A, the second holding display device 25B, and the general-purpose holding display device 25C, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like are applied as the movable body. Good.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable body 300 as a movable body illustrated the form by which at least one part (latter half part) was provided in the back side of the game board 2, this invention is limited to this. It may be provided in front of the game board surface 200A of the board board 200.

  In the embodiment, the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, etc.) different from the movable body is supported by the movable body. Although the form of supporting means has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the movable body itself or a driving mechanism for operating the movable body or the like may be used as the supporting means, such as a lock mechanism that fixes the movable mechanism at appropriate timing Good.

  In the embodiment, when the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300, the rear movable plate 261 is located behind the rear transmission plate 261. Although the arrangement form is illustrated, for example, the movable body is configured to be extendable back and forth, and extends from a position behind the rear transmission plate 261 to a position ahead of the rear transmission plate 261. You may make it produce a feeling of depth.

  In the embodiment, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300, and then the first protrusion 303 and the second movable body are controlled by the second control. Although the form which the 2 protrusion part 304 protrudes was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The 1st protrusion part 303 and the 2nd protrusion part 304 protrude or move simultaneously with unification or before union. You may do it.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the window 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, and the window 51 includes the first transmission body 250 and the first transmission body 250. A first transmission body 251 as a plate-like portion and a first cylindrical body 252 as a cylindrical portion. And the second cylindrical body 253, and the cylindrical portion has a reinforcing structure portion 254.

  Thus, by having the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 as a cylindrical part, even if it does not enlarge the plate | board thickness of the opening-and-closing frame 50, the front transmission board 251 as a plate-shaped part and the back Since the transmission effect can be improved because the transmission plate 261 can be separated from the transmission plate 261, the cylindrical portion of the first transmission body 250 is reinforced, so that the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 251, which are the plate-shaped portions of the first transmission body 250. It is possible to prevent an illegal act such as an unauthorized member entering from a cylindrical portion that covers the periphery of the space S formed between the transmission plate 261 and the transparent plate 261.

  More specifically, the cylindrical portion made up of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 is provided so as to be visible from the player so as to protrude forward from the opening of the opening / closing frame 50, so that glass is formed. There is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of entering a fraudulent member or the like from the cylindrical portion while avoiding the front transmission plate 251 made of a plate is performed, but by providing the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of places as described above, Since the strength of the cylindrical portion is improved, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as bending the cylindrical portion to create a gap between the front transmission plate 251 or making a hole to make an unauthorized member enter. .

  Further, the reinforcing structure portion 254 is an uneven portion extending from the front transmission plate 251 toward the second transmission body 260 (for example, the convex strip portions 254A and 255A and the concave strip portions 254B and 255B). The cylindrical portion can be suitably reinforced. More specifically, since the strength in the front-rear direction is improved, the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 can be prevented from being damaged by an impact when an external force is applied, such as the front transmission plate 251 being hit. .

  Moreover, the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 as a cylindrical part are formed in the cylinder shape with the non-light-transmitting synthetic resin material. In addition, the outer peripheral surface of the first cylindrical body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second cylindrical body 253 are plated so that ambient light (for example, external light or from an adjacent gaming machine) It is possible to prevent the visibility of the game area 10 from being reduced due to light or the like.

  Further, by forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. The appearance appearance can be improved by providing the decorative portion on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion by the plating process applied to the portion and the outer peripheral surface.

  In addition, an upper plate 90 as a storage unit that can store a game ball is provided below the window unit 51, and the front transmission plate 251 is provided so as to be inclined toward the game area 10 toward the lower side. When the game ball is thrown into the upper plate 90, it can be avoided that the first transparent body 250 becomes an obstacle.

  Moreover, the 1st transmission body 250 and the 2nd transmission body 260 are integrated so that isolation | separation is possible. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are integrated by attaching a screw N2, and can be separated by removing the screw N2. ing.

  By doing so, for example, one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 is scratched or deteriorated over time, so that the visibility of the game area 10 is reduced or damaged. Thus, when replacement is necessary, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are separated so that only one of them can be partially replaced, so that the cost for replacement can be reduced. . In particular, it is possible to replace only the second transmission body 260 having the rear transmission plate 261 in which the shape or position of the hole 270 differs depending on the model, and the first transmission body 250 can be used in common for a plurality of models. Become.

  In the embodiment, the hole 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 constituting the second transmission body 260 is located at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board surface plate 200, that is, a game ball flowing area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part is formed at a position corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball. It may be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form in which the hole 270 was formed in the back transmission board 261 which comprises the 2nd transmission body 260 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A back transmission board A cutout portion may be formed in 261. Specifically, for example, in order to make the gaming area 10 visible, the rear transmission plate 261 is formed in substantially the same shape as the gaming area 10, but a notch is formed in a part of the periphery thereof, You may enable it to move a movable body to the front side via this notch until it is located in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the hole part 270 illustrated the form provided only in one place, this invention is not limited to this, The hole part and notch part are formed in multiple places. Also good.

  In the embodiment, the first transmission body 250 includes the front transmission plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion made of a permeable member, and the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 as the cylindrical portions. The first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 are made of a non-permeable member, that is, an example in which a part of the first transparent body 250 is made of a non-permeable member. However, this invention is not limited to this, The 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 may also be comprised with the permeable member. That is, the first transmissive body 250 may be configured such that at least a part of the plate-like portion or the tubular portion is constituted by a permeable member.

  In the above embodiment, the second transmission body 260 includes the rear transmission plate 261 and the frame body 262, and the frame body 262 is formed of a non-permeable member, that is, the second transmission body. Although the form which a part of body 260 consists of a non-permeable member was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The frame 262 may also be comprised with the permeable member. That is, at least a part of the second transmissive body 260 only needs to be configured by a permeable member.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which applied the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 was illustrated as a cylindrical part which comprises the 1st permeation | transmission body 250, this invention is limited to this. The cylindrical portion is not a perfect cylindrical shape as long as it is configured by a wall portion that closes the side peripheral surface of the space S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. For example, it may be constituted by a side wall portion formed in an arch shape. Specifically, the cylindrical portion has a substantially square shape in side view, but may have a triangular shape in side view.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion constituting the first transmission body 250 and the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 as the cylindrical portions are different from each other. Although the form constituted by assembling the members integrally was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the plate-like portion and the tubular portion are formed by integral molding with a synthetic resin material having permeability. You may do it.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the cylindrical part illustrated the form comprised by the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253, ie, several members, this invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be constituted by a single member.

  In the embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 is a glass material, the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 are non-transparent synthetic resin materials, and the rear transmission plate 261 is a synthetic material having translucency. Although the form comprised with the resin material was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, you may comprise the front permeable board 251 with the synthetic resin material which has translucency, and back transmission. The plate 261 may be made of a glass material. Moreover, you may comprise the 1st cylindrical body 252 and the 2nd cylindrical body 253 with the synthetic resin material which has translucency.

(Modification 10)
Here, Modification 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit as a modified example 8, FIG. 62B is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, and FIG. 62C is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the window unit. A front view and (D) are side views of (C).

As shown in FIG. 62A, when the cylindrical body 252A constituting the cylindrical portion of the first transmission body 250 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency, for example, the first movable body 300 is used. In the state where the predetermined portion of the movable portion 350 has moved to the first effect position that is in front of the rear transmission plate 261, the light emitted outward from the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR mounted on the first movable body 300 is The light passes through the cylindrical body 252A and is emitted to the left and right sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1.
Therefore, it is possible to appeal the effect not only to the player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to the surrounding players.

  As shown in FIG. 62B, for example, in a state where the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 has moved to an effect position that is in front of the rear transmission plate 261, the upper portion of the opening / closing frame 50 above the window portion 51 ( Alternatively, the light emitted from the production LED 9 provided on the left and right sides or the lower side may pass through the cylindrical body 252A and be emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space S. . By doing in this way, it becomes possible to irradiate light from directly above (or just beside or directly below) the first movable body 300 that has moved to the first performance position, so that the performance effect of the first movable body 300 can be further improved. it can.

  62B, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the first transmission body 250, the second transmission body 260, and the like. 62 (cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62) produces a predetermined effect (for example, light emitted from the effect LED 9 passes through the cylindrical body 252A to the first movable body 300 inside the space S. The decoration effect for decorating the first movable body 300 is performed by executing the light emission decoration of the first movable body 300 by being emitted. That is, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can be decorated with a predetermined effect on the side surface (tubular body 252A in FIG. 62). For this reason, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  There are a plurality of types of execution patterns as decoration effects. For example, the effect LED 9 is a full color LED, and as shown in FIG. 62B, the effect LED 9 can emit light in three types of light emission patterns (plural types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. Depending on the type of the light emission pattern (the type of execution pattern for the decoration effect), the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of big hit expectation) controlled to the advantageous state may be different. For example, the degree of expectation may be blue (expectation: small) <green (expectation: medium) <red (expectation: high). According to this, the player has a decoration effect (light emission effect of the first movable body 300 according to the degree of expectation by irradiating the first movable body 300 with the blue, green, and red light from the effect LED 9). Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, even if the entire cylindrical body 252A does not have translucency, only part of the cylindrical body 252A needs to have translucency. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62C, a see-through window 258 is formed on a part of the peripheral surface (for example, the left and right side surfaces) of the cylindrical body 252A made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material. Are arranged so that the display unit faces the see-through window 258 when the display units 5X and 5Y are moved to an effect position where the display unit is in front of the rear transmission plate 261. The images displayed on the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y inside S may be viewed through the see-through window 258. By doing in this way, since the predetermined effect that the image displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y moved to the display position can be viewed from the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, the effect effect is further improved. Can do.

(Modification 11)
As in the eleventh modification shown in FIG. 63, the second transmission body 260 (second transmission member) has a light incident portion 260a through which light can enter, and the gaming machine frame 3 (the gaming machine main body) It has LED9a (light emitting component) arrange | positioned at the opposing part 3a facing the light incident part 260a of 2 transmissive body 260, and cylindrical body 252A (side surface part) of the 2nd transmissive body 260 is light incident part 260a from LED9a. Light having a light guide portion 260b capable of guiding the inside of the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion), and the light from the light guide portion 260b is a space portion of the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion). The light may be emitted from the S-side surface toward the first movable body 300. The cylindrical body 252A is, for example, a light guide member, and light incident on the cylindrical body 252A can be emitted from the surface on the space S side. The cylindrical body 252A has a light shielding member 260c (incident suppression means) at the tip of the first transparent body 250 side, and the light incident on the cylindrical body 252A is the first transparent body. The light is not incident on 250. A reflective member (incident suppression means) may be provided instead of the light shielding member 260c.

  According to the eleventh modification, the LED 9a is arranged in the gaming machine frame 3, and the second transmitting body 260 of the opening / closing frame 50 that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 receives the light incident from the LED 9a in the second manner. A light guide 260b that can be propagated inside the transmission body 260 and guided to the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) is provided, and light from the light guide portion 260b is first transmitted from the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion). Since the light can be emitted toward the movable body 300, a decoration effect can be realized without electrically connecting the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 with a connection cable or the like. That is, it is not necessary to provide an electrical component on the opening / closing frame 50. For this reason, the problem of biting the electrical wiring when closing the open / close frame 50 can be solved.

  The LED 9a (light-emitting component) is provided on the opening / closing frame 50 side, and the control board, the power supply board, etc. provided on the LED 9a on the opening / closing frame 50 side and the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) side are electrically connected by a connection cable. You may make it connect to. According to this configuration, the open / close frame 50 includes the LED 9a (light emitting component) for causing the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) to emit light. An optical path to 252A (side surface portion) can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to dispose the LED 9a (light emitting component) on the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) side, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine frame 3 (game machine main body) can be improved.

  Further, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, as shown in FIG. 63, a plurality of types of operations (for example, rotation of the first movable body 300). , Expansion, swing, deformation, etc.) can be executed, and the execution pattern of the decoration effect differs according to the multiple types of operations (multiple types according to the rotation, expansion, swing, deformation of the first movable body 300) Or the like. In this case, a variety of decorative effects can be provided. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In the game area, the game area side light-emitting parts (for example, the light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A, or the normal variable) are different from the light-emitting parts (for example, the LED 9a shown in FIG. 63). When the light-emitting component (LED) of the winning ball device 6B and at least one of the light-emitting components (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light are arranged and the decoration effect is executed, You may make it light-emit with a brightness | luminance lower than when the side light emission component is light-extinguished or this decoration effect is not performed. In this case, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can be made conspicuous by light irradiation from the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion). For this reason, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Also, the opening / closing frame 50 is provided with an effect LED 9 (opening / closing door-side light emitting component) different from the LED 9a (light emitting component) shown in FIG. 63, and when executing the decoration effect, the effect LED 9 is turned off or the decoration effect. You may make it light-emit with a brightness | luminance lower than when not performing. In this case, when the decoration effect is executed, the effect LED 9 (opening / closing door side light-emitting component) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off or light is emitted with a lower luminance than when the decoration effect is not executed. The first movable body 300 that has entered between the body 250 and the second transmission body 260 is transmitted to the first movable body 300 through the light guide portion 260b and emitted from the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion). The first movable body 300 is bright and the portions other than the window portion 51 of the opening / closing frame 50 are darkened to make the decoration effect stand out. For this reason, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  The predetermined effect may be executable based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. The aspect of the predetermined effect may be changeable based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 12)
As in Modification 12 shown in FIG. 64 (A), the specific effect may be executable on the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) that connects the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. According to the modified example 12, the specific effect is executed in the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) that connects the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, so that the effect of the performance can be improved. Further, the specific effect on the side surface portion can be executed regardless of whether or not the first movable body 300 has advanced. For example, the first movable body 300 is located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. When entering, by executing a specific effect on the side surface, it is possible to provide a powerful movable object effect to the player. Moreover, when the movable body does not enter between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, it is possible to expect the execution of the movable body performance by executing the specific performance on the side surface portion. The effect of production can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 64A, the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) includes image display means DP (for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, etc.) that displays an image as the specific effect. According to this, since the image display means DP provided in the side part displays the image of the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. It should be noted that, instead of the image display means DP, a projection means (projector) for projecting an image is provided, and an image from the projection means (projector) is projected onto the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion), whereby this cylindrical shape. The specific effect may be executable on the body 252A (side portion).

(Modification 13)
As in Modification 13 shown in FIG. 64 (B), the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) guides and displays an image for the specific effect as the incident light is guided inside. Light guide display means (for example, a light guide plate GP) may be provided. For example, light that is incident on the cylindrical body 252A and guided through the cylindrical body 252A is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the incident light is used to perform light guide display on the light guide plate GP. Light from a light-emitting component (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR shown in FIG. 62) passes through the cylindrical body 252A and is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the light guide display on the light guide plate GP is performed by this incident light. Anything is acceptable. According to the modified example 13, since the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP) provided on the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) guides and displays an image for a specific effect, the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

(Modification 14)
As in Modification 14 shown in FIG. 65A, the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) includes a light guide member 260d capable of guiding incident light, and the light guide member 260d includes a plurality of light emitting members. Portion 9b (three horizontal LED groups in FIG. 65) and corresponding region portion 260e in which the light guide member 260d is divided into a plurality corresponding to each light emitting portion 9b (three horizontal rows corresponding region portion 260e in FIG. 65). ). The cylindrical body 252A itself may be a light guide member. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portion 260e in the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) corresponding to the light emitting portion 9b emits light. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding area portion 260e sequentially emits light from the far side to the near side. On the contrary, it is good also as the effect which light-emits sequentially from the nearer to the farther from the player. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modification 14, the effect of production can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (B), a plurality of types of light emission mode patterns (patterns in which only the innermost corresponding region portion 260e emits light, the innermost side) There are three types of patterns in which the corresponding two corresponding region portions 260e emit light and a pattern in which all the corresponding region portions 260e emit light), and the degree of expectation that is controlled in an advantageous state depends on the type of these light emission mode patterns. It may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, as the specific effects, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of the light emission color, the brightness, and the blinking interval is different). The expectation level may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  When a specific effect is executed, the game area side light-emitting component (for example, the light-emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light-emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game board) Alternatively, at least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part of the surface of 2 to emit light may be turned off or emit light with a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the game area side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed, so that the specific effect can be conspicuous. For this reason, a player can be watched at a specific effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, when executing a specific effect, the door-side light-emitting component (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) may be turned off or emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when executing the specific effect, the door side light emitting component of the opening / closing door (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) is turned off or emits light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. A specific performance can be conspicuous. For this reason, a player can be watched at a specific effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, motion detection means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion is provided, and based on detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, a stick by the controller sensor unit 35A). The specific effect may be executable (based on detection of an operation of the controller 31A or detection of an operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). According to this, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, light from the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP shown in FIG. 64B) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. You may make it provide the incident suppression means (For example, the light shielding member 260c shown in FIG. 63, a reflection member, etc.) which suppresses entering into at least one of 2 transmissive bodies 260. FIG. According to this, the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate shown in FIG. 64 (B)) is made by the incident suppression means (for example, the light shielding member 260c, the reflection member, or the like shown in FIG. 63, or the separation portion (gap portion)). GP) or light from the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 65A) is prevented from being incident on at least one of the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Therefore, it can suppress that a part of the 1st transmission body 250 or the 2nd transmission body 260 becomes an unexpected light emission mode. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, the window 51 may include a main body member to which the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can be attached and detached. For example, the first transparent body 250 is exposed on the player side, and the first transparent body 250 may be intentionally damaged by a malicious player or the like, and is more easily damaged than the second transparent body 260. Further, the second movable body 260 may come into contact with the first movable body 300 when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened when the first movable body 300 is advanced. As described above, since the first transmissive body 250 or the second transmissive body 260 can be replaced in units, there is no need to replace the entire window portion 51. For this reason, the part replacement cost can be reduced, and the maintainability of the window portion 51 is excellent.

(Modification 15)
In the modified example 14, the horizontal three rows of light emitting portions 9b and the three horizontal rows of corresponding light emitting portions 260e are shown in FIG. 65. However, as in the modified example 15 shown in FIG. It is good also as the part 9b and the corresponding | compatible area | region part 260e of several vertical columns. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding regions 260e in a plurality of vertical columns emit light. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding area portion 260e emits light sequentially from the bottom to the top. On the contrary, it is good also as the effect which light-emits sequentially from the top to the bottom. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modified example 15, the effect of production can be improved.

(Modification 16)
Next, Modification 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit of Modification Example 16, and FIG. 67B is a front view showing an effect mode of light guide plate production. In Modification 16, an example in which the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 function as a light guide plate will be described.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), the front transmission plate 251 reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 290 that has entered inside from the left and right side end faces forward and emits it from the front. A light emitting area E1 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern, that is, a light emitting area E1 that emits light by entering light inside the front transmission plate 251 (see the halftone dot area in FIG. 67B), and left and right side end surfaces And a non-light-emitting region that does not form a predetermined light-guiding pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 290 that is incident on the inside to the front and emits the light from the front surface.

  The rear transmission plate 261 is provided in the first movable body 300, and forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 291 that is incident from the side end surface of the hole 270 to the front and emits it from the front surface. The light emitting region E2 that emits light, that is, the light emitting region E2 that emits light by the light incident on the inside of the rear transmission plate 261 (see the hatched region in FIG. 67B), and the light incident from the side end surface of the hole 270. A non-light-emitting region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 291 forward and emits the light from the front surface.

  The light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed on the back side in a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plates LED 290 and 291 incident on the inside from the end face to be emitted from the front surface. Specifically, the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a sectional view when the light traveling direction is viewed from the side (details). Not shown).

  When light is incident inside from the end face of the front transmission plate 251 or the rear transmission plate 261, a predetermined pattern is applied to the front transmission plate 251 or the rear transmission plate 261 by a dot pattern formed by a plurality of concave portions formed in the light emitting regions E1 and E2. An image (still image) is displayed (see the halftone area and the shaded area in FIG. 67B).

  As shown in the present modification 16, the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 and the rear transmission plate 261 of the second transmission body 260 are light guide plates that guide the light incident from the end face to emit light. By functioning, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable body effect. In particular, even in a state where the movable body has moved to the effect position where the predetermined portion is in front of the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to produce the movable object by causing the light emitting area E1 to emit light in front of it.

  Since the light emitting area E1 and the light emitting area E2 behind the light emitting area E1 can emit light, the light emitting areas E1 and E2 corresponding to the front and rear positions of the movable body can be emitted. It is possible to produce a light emission effect at a location closer to. In addition, by simultaneously emitting light in the light emitting areas E1 and E2, it is possible to generate a sense of depth in the front and back, and thus the production effect is improved.

  Further, in the present modification 16, the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the movable body can be incident from the end face of the hole 270, so that the first transmission body 250 attached to the opening / closing frame 50 side, It is not necessary to provide a light emitter in the second transmission body 260, and it is not necessary to route the wiring from the side of the gaming machine frame 3 on which the effect control board 12 is mounted, so that the complexity of the wiring work can be avoided. In addition, you may make it light-emit the area | region E2 by the light from light-guide plate LED provided in the window part unit 51A side. In addition, although the light emitting areas E1 and E2 are provided in both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, they may be provided in only one of them.

  Further, in the present modification 16, although an example in which the light emitting areas E1 and E2 are provided in both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 has been described, the light incident from the end surface is guided through the cylindrical portion. You may make it function as a light guide which carries out surface light emission. In this case, the light emitting region provided in a part of the outer peripheral surface emits light by configuring the tubular portion with a translucent member having translucency and allowing light to enter from the front end or the rear end of the tubular portion. You can do it.

(Modification 17)
68, a movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the movable light guide plate MGP is connected to the first position P1 of the first movable body 300. The third position P3 can be located between the second position P2, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, the first movable body 300 does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It may be possible to move to the four positions P4. For example, the movable light guide plate MGP is a light guide plate (transparent rendering means) that performs light guide display when light is guided to the inside, and a third position P3 and a fourth position P4 by a light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown). And can be moved. As shown in FIG. 68, the fourth position P4 is a position closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2. The light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown) includes a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor (determination means) for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP.

  In the movable body effect execution process (S347G) of Modification 17 shown in FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71). When it is determined that it is the movement timing (S71; Yes), the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP from the third position P3 to the fourth position P4 is started (S72). After the process of S72, it is determined whether or not the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73). When the movable light guide plate MGP is positioned at the fourth position P4, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the detection signal of the fourth position sensor, and based on the detection signal from the fourth position sensor, the movable light guide plate MGP is at the fourth position P4. Can be determined. When the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73; Yes), the first movable body 300 starts to move to the second position P2 (S74), and the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P4. The operation at the second position P2 is executed (S75).

  On the other hand, when the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4 (S73; No), the operation of the first movable body 300 is limited (S76). When the detection signal from the fourth position sensor is not on after the predetermined first time has elapsed since the start of the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the movable light guide plate MGP It may be determined that the fourth position P4 has not been reached. Further, the second time from the start of movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 (however, the second time is a time shorter than the first time and includes a time away from the third position P3). If the detection signal from the third position sensor does not turn off even after a lapse of time, the movable light guide plate MGP remains at the third position P3, and the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4. You may judge.

  As the contents for restricting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S76), as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1, and the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2. May be stopped, or the operation of the first movable body 300 may be stopped.

  After the process of S76, the light guide plate operation abnormality flag indicating that the movable light guide plate MGP is abnormal in operation is set to ON (S77). In addition, when it is not the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71; No), after the process of S75, or after the process of S77, the movable body effect execution process is ended.

  According to the modified example 17, when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, the first movable body 300 can be moved to the fourth position P4 that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. A powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player. For this reason, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP is closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2, the movable light guide plate MGP has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Since the movable light guide plate MGP has moved to the fourth position P4 on the nearer side than the second position P2, the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP can be provided to provide a movable body effect. The effect can be improved.

  Since the movable light guide plate MGP is a transparent rendering means that guides and displays light by being guided to the inside, the effect of the rendering can be improved by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP. For example, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and the first movable body 300 is located at the first position P1, that is, the movable light guide plate MGP is in front of the first movable body 300 at the first position P1. Since the movable body effect by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP and the first movable body 300 located behind the movable light guide plate MGP can be executed, the player can provide a powerful movable body effect for the player. can do. In addition, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4 and the first movable body 300 is located at the second position P2, that is, the light guide display of the advanced movable light guide plate MGP and the first advanced after that. Since the movable body effect by the movable body 300 can be executed, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player. Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects that the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects that the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

  When the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1 instead of moving the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. be able to. For this reason, it can prevent that the 1st movable body 300 contacts the movable light guide plate MGP which cannot move, and can prevent damage to the 1st movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP. Moreover, since the 1st movable body 300 operate | moves in the 1st position P1, the discomfort with respect to a movable body effect can be reduced.

  Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is not moved to the second position P2, or the first movable body 300 is kept stopped. Further, it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from coming into contact with the movable light guide plate MGP that cannot move, and it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP from being damaged.

  In addition, the degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state may be different between when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and when it is located at the fourth position P4. . According to this, the player can be watched at the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  When the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B). (LED), at least one of the light emitting components (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light is turned off or when the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. You may make it light-emit with low brightness | luminance. According to this, a movable body effect can be made conspicuous. For this reason, the player can be watched at the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  When the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the effect LED 9 (opening / closing door side light emitting component) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off or when the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. Alternatively, the light may be emitted with low luminance. According to this, a movable body effect can be made conspicuous. For this reason, the player can be watched at the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.), the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the second of the first movable body 300 are performed. The movement to the position P2 may be executable. According to this, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 18)
In the modification 17, the fourth position P4 is closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68, but is not limited to this. For example, as in Modification 18 shown in FIG. 70, the fourth position P4 may be a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300. Even when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) is a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modification 18, the first movable body 300 is in the second position. The movable body effect that the movable light guide plate MGP moves to P2 and is located at the fourth position P4 away from the moving path of the first movable body 300 can be provided, and the effect of the effect can be improved. .

  In addition, since the movable body effect can be executed by positioning the first movable body 300 that has advanced to the second position and the transparent rendering means moved to a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, the player A powerful movable body effect can be provided.

  In addition, although not particularly illustrated, as a support portion that supports the first cylindrical body 252 and the second cylindrical body 253 that are provided in a region other than the window portion 51 in the opening and closing frame 50 and is a cylindrical portion, for example, the opening and closing frame 50 Since the cylindrical portion is supported by the LED cover serving as the support portion by providing the LED cover that projects from the front surface of the LED and forms the light emitting portion that emits light by the production LED 9, it is possible to suppress damage and fraud.

  In the embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-like portion is disposed so as to close the opening on the front side of the cylindrical portion, and the entire game area 10 can be visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. However, the front transmission plate 251 serving as a plate-like portion includes a first plate-like portion that closes an opening on the front side of the tubular portion, and a second plate-like portion that is disposed outside the tubular portion. It may be configured.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which has arrange | positioned so that the front permeable board 251 may incline with respect to the rear transmissive board 261 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The following modified examples 19 and 16 As shown, the front transmission plate 251 may be disposed substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. Further, only a part of the front transmission plate 251 may be inclined and the other part may be arranged in parallel.

(Modification 19)
Here, Modification 19 will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (A) and 71 (B) are longitudinal sectional views showing the window unit of the modification 19. FIG.

  As in Modification 9 shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the front transmission plate 251 includes a first plate-like portion 251A that closes an opening on the front side of the tubular body 252A serving as a tubular portion, and a tubular body. And a second plate-like portion 251B disposed outside 252A.

As shown in FIG. 71A, the first plate-shaped portion 251A is disposed so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, and the second plate-shaped portion 251B is disposed substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. May be.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), both the first plate-like portion 251A and the second plate-like portion 251B may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261.

  In the embodiment, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R arranged below the first movable body 300 are positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261 even when moved to the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side, the first is described. The movable body 300 can be moved to the front side until a predetermined portion of the main body 302 is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261, and the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R may be moved to the front side until the predetermined portion is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side with respect to the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Good.

  In such a case, the first predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is in front of the predetermined portions of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R in a state where each movable body is moved to the effect position. It is preferable that it is located in. By doing so, the amount of movement of the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R) can be made different according to the inclination of the front transmission plate 251. .

  In addition, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are positioned below the player's line-of-sight position when moved to the effect position, the front side from the rear transmission plate 261 If it moves to, the game area 10 (particularly, the start winning opening or the big winning opening) below the movable body may become difficult to see due to the movable body that has moved to the effect position. Therefore, as described above, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R below the first movable body 300 are moved so as not to protrude forward from the first movable body 300 at the production position. Thus, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lower game area 10 from being lowered.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the front transmission plate 251 as a plate-shaped part was formed in the flat surface front surface, this invention is not limited to this, Non-flat surface shape (For example, It may be formed in a curved surface shape or a spherical shape.

(Modification 20)
Next, Modification 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 72A is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the window unit of Modification 20 is located at the first viewing position, and FIG. 72B is a longitudinal section showing a state in which the window unit has moved to the second viewing position. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, the window unit 51 </ b> A has been illustrated in a form in which the cylindrical portion is provided so as to be immovable with the cylindrical portion protruding forward with respect to the opening / closing frame 50, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, like the first transmission body 250 of the window unit 51B of the modification 10, the front transmission plate 251 is substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261 at a position away from the rear transmission plate 261. The lower side portion between the first viewing position (see FIG. 72A) positioned in this manner and the second viewing position (see FIG. 72B) whose upper end is inclined forward with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. It may be provided so as to be able to turn around a turning shaft 280 provided in the left and right direction.

  In this case, the first transparent body 250, which is a part of the window unit 51B, is provided so as to protrude toward the player side from the first visual recognition position toward the second visual recognition position. It is difficult to understand that the body 250 has moved to the second viewing position. However, since the first movable body 300 moves forward in accordance with the movement of the first transmission body 250 to the second visual recognition position, it is easy to recognize that the first transmission body 250 has moved. More specifically, for example, when the tilt angle of the front transmission plate 251 changes, the incident angle of the light emitted from the movable body LED 350A to the front transmission plate 251 changes, and thereby the back surface of the front transmission plate 251 is changed. The amount of light reflected by the player increases and the front surface of the gaming area 10 behind is illuminated, and the amount of light emitted forward is reduced, thereby improving the visibility of the gaming area 10 from the player side.

  Moreover, since the 1st movable body 300 also returns to the back side according to the movement to the 1st visual recognition position from the 2nd visual recognition position of the 1st transmission body 250, the production effect improves. Further, the light reflected by the front transmission plate 251 also changes due to the change in the incident angle of the external light R with respect to the front transmission plate 251, so that the first movable body 300 and the game area 10 can be seen through the front transmission plate 251. By changing the aspect, it becomes easier to recognize that the first transmission body 250 has moved forward.

  Further, since the movable body jumps out to the player side together with the first transmission body 250, an impact can be given. Furthermore, since the lower side of the first transmission body 250 does not move, it is possible to avoid obstructing other parts (for example, throwing a game ball into the upper plate 90 below).

  In the modified example 20, as shown in FIG. 72, a transmission member operation effect that moves only the first transmission body 250 to the player side can be executed. In addition, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are also possible. It is also possible to execute a transmission member operation effect that causes both of them to be operated on the player side.

  For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modification 20 shown in FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the variation pattern is the super reach B (S501; Yes), the type of frame motion effect is determined (S501A). For example, in the process of S501A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the frame motion effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the frame motion effect determination table shown in FIG. 73 (B). Thus, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame motion effect, and if so, the motion pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the case of the super reach B (loss) variation pattern, “one transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes)” is determined with a probability of 70%. The transmission member operation pattern (the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 protrude) ”is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the “one transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes)” is determined with a probability of 30%, and “both transmission member operation patterns ( The first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 protrude) ”is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the frame operation effect by both transmissive member operation patterns is easier to be executed than in the case of the super reach B (losing) variation pattern, and the frame operation by both transmissive member operation patterns. About the production, you can have a big hit expectation and the fun of the game will improve. Also, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) variation pattern, the one transmission member operation pattern is executed, and therefore the frame operation effect by the one transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes) is expected to be a big hit. You can have a feeling and the fun of the game will improve.

  After the process of S501A, the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect is determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determination table shown in FIG. Thus, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern when it is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) variation pattern, “No execution” is 15%, “Execution” is “First operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” "Is determined with a probability of 55%, and" with execution "," second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) "is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is 20%. The “second execution pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” than the case of the super reach B (loss) variation pattern. The production is easy to be executed, and the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation with respect to the movable body production in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is executed, so the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. The movable body effect that executes ACT1 can also have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Note that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the variation pattern of the super reach B but also in the variation pattern of the super reach A. The variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, a determination ratio may be set such that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  Returning to FIG. 73A, after the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined (S503). If it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the ON state (S504). After the process of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (S501; No), or when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

  In Modification 20, it is possible to execute a transmission member operation effect that causes at least the first transmission body 250 to move toward the player side, and the transmission member operation effect is executed, whereby the first movable body 300 is changed to the first transmission body. Since it can move between 250 and the 2nd permeation | transmission body 260, a powerful movable body effect can be provided with respect to a player. For this reason, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, the transmission member operation effect is an effect in which only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side or an operation in which both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side. It is possible to provide a powerful transmission member operation effect for the player. For this reason, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, as the transmission member operation effect, only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, while the transmission member operation pattern, and both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side. There are both transmission member operation patterns, and on the other hand, since the transmission member operation pattern and both transmission member operation patterns have different expectation levels (for example, the big hit expectation level) controlled to be in an advantageous state, the player is in the transmission member operation effect. Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, the first movable body 300 is changed to the first transparent body 250 based on the execution of the transmission member motion effect and the detection of the player's movement by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be movable between the second transmissive body 260. In this case, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 moves between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 is moved. The second movement pattern in which the body 300 does not move between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be executable. In this case, the movable body effect can be varied, and the interest of the movable body effect can be improved. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is different between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern, it is possible to make the player gaze at the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game, At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for causing at least a part of the surface of the panel 2 to emit light may be turned off or emit light with a lower luminance than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transmission member operation effect can be conspicuous. For this reason, a player can be made to gaze at the transmission member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the opening / closing door side light emitting component (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) is turned off or light is emitted with lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. Good. In this case, the transmission member operation effect can be conspicuous. For this reason, a player can be made to gaze at the transmission member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component of the window 51 may be turned on or lighted with a higher luminance than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transmission member operation effect can be conspicuous. For this reason, a player can be made to gaze at the transmission member operation effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, detection means (for example, a position sensor for the first transmission body) that detects that the first transmission body 250 has moved to the player side is provided, and it is detected that the first transmission body 250 has moved to the player side. In such a case, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be executed. In this case, a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 after the first transparent body 250 is moved to the player side are appropriately used. Can be executed. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved. In addition, when the first transmission body 250 is not operating on the player side, the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, so the first transmission body 250 and the first transmission body 250 1 Damage to the movable body 300 can be prevented.

(Modification 21)
As in Modification 21 shown in FIG. 74, the open / close frame 50 (frame body) includes operable frame-side movable bodies SL and SR (frame-side movable means). The frame-side movable bodies SL and SR can be displaced by a frame-side movable body drive mechanism (not shown) into a non-projecting state indicated by a broken line in FIG. 75A and a protruding state indicated by a solid line in FIG. It has become. In addition, a frame-linked effect that operates the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR in association with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (simply referred to as “linked performance”). May be executable). In this frame-linked effect, an effect of matching the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the operations of the frame-side movable bodies SL, SR are started. It has become. That is, the first operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 is synchronized with the operation in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are in the protruding state shown by the solid line in FIG. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect that is excellent in the interlocking feeling when the operation starts.

  For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modification 21 shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). If it is determined that the variation pattern is the super reach B (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect is determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable object effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable object effect determining table shown in FIG. Thus, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect and the operation pattern when it is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the case of the super reach B (losing) variation pattern, “No execution” is 15%, “Execution” is “First operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” "Is determined with a probability of 55%, and" with execution "," second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1) "is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, “no execution” is 10%, “execution is” and “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is 20%. The “second execution pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” is determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body effect is easier to be executed than in the case of losing, and it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the movable body of the “second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)” than the case of the super reach B (loss) variation pattern. The production is easy to be executed, and the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation with respect to the movable body production in which the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 51 is performed, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Also, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the “first operation pattern PTB-1 (only the first operation ACT1)” is executed, so the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. The movable body effect that executes ACT1 can also have a big hit expectation, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Note that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the variation pattern of the super reach B but also in the variation pattern of the super reach A. The variation pattern of super reach may include a variation pattern having pseudo continuous variation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, a determination ratio may be set such that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations increases. What is necessary is just to set so that a determination ratio may differ according to whether it is a big hit and the frequency | count of a pseudo | simulation variation.

  After the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined (S503). If it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the ON state (S504).

  After the process of S504, it is determined whether or not the second operation pattern PTB-2 has been determined (S504A). When the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A; Yes), the type of the frame-side movable body effect that is the effect in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR operate is determined (S504B). For example, in the processing of S504B, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the frame-side movable body effect, and determines the extracted numerical data and the frame-side movable body effect determination shown in FIG. Using the table, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame-side movable body effect, and if it is executed, its operation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) variation pattern, the “non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)” is determined with an 80% probability, and the “interlocking pattern ( The first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are linked) ”is determined with a probability of 20%. In contrast, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the “non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)” is determined with a probability of 20%, and the “interlocking pattern (first movable body 300) is determined. And the frame side movable bodies SL and SR are linked with each other) with a probability of 80%. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the frame operation effect by the interlocking pattern is easier to be executed than in the case of the super reach B (losing) variation pattern, and the first movable body 300 and the frame side movable body SL. , SR can be linked to the production effect, you can have a big expectation, and the fun of the game is improved. In addition, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is possible to have a big hit expectation for the non-interlocking production in which only the first movable body 300 operates without the frame side movable bodies SL and SR operating. , The fun of gaming is improved.

  After the process of S504B, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (S501; No), or when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

  In Modification 21, it is possible to execute a frame-linked effect that operates the frame-side movable means of the frame in association with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Therefore, a powerful frame-linked effect can be provided to the player. For this reason, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Moreover, when the 1st movable body 300 approached between the 1st permeation | transmission body 250 and the 2nd permeation | transmission body 260, the interlocking pattern which operates a frame side movable means, and the non-interlocking pattern which does not operate a frame side movable means Since the frame interlocking effect can be varied, the interest of the frame interlocking effect can be improved. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, since the degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state is different between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern, the player can be watched at the frame interlocking effect. Thereby, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, since the timing when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 is matched with the timing when the operation of the frame-side movable means is started, both operations are started. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect that is excellent in interlocking feeling. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

  Note that the timing for returning the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 may be matched with the timing for returning the frame-side movable means before the operation. In this case, it is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect that is excellent in the interlocking feeling when both operations are finished. For this reason, the effect of production can be improved.

  Further, in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, at least a part of the frame operating means (for example, the hitting operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74). It may be possible to execute a frame-linked effect in which is operated. Here, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), at least a part of the hitting operation handle HB protrudes. Note that the operation of the operation means may be at least one of vibration, swing, advance, retreat, and movement, for example, at least a part of the operation means (for example, the hitting operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74). . According to this, since the operation of the operation means is directly transmitted to the player, a more powerful frame-linked effect can be provided to the player. For this reason, the effect of production can be enhanced. The operation means is not limited to the hitting operation handle HB, but may be a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like.

  Further, the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be possible to enter. In this case, the effect of production can be improved. Further, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 22)
77A and 77B, the first movable body 300 is not positioned between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250. And the second transmission body 260 are different in size. For example, in the first movable body 300, the upper portion of the first movable body 300 can be advanced upward, and the lower portion of the first movable body 300 can be advanced downward, and can be expanded vertically. It is what. Specifically, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, for example, at the first position P1, the hole 270 of the second transmission body 260 (FIG. 24). The vertical length LW is smaller than the opening diameter (the vertical length LY of the opening) of the hole 270) formed in the rear transmission plate 261 shown in FIG. When the length of the hole 270 is between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the opening diameter of the hole 270 (the opening diameter of the opening 270) The longitudinal length LZ is greater than the longitudinal length LY). For example, the first movable body 300 extends in the longitudinal direction to the length LZ after exiting from the hole 270. When the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the first movable body 300 may be moved from the first position P1 to the second position P2 at a constant speed. The speed may gradually increase until entering the portion 270, and after entering the hole portion 270, it may be moved at a higher speed.

  According to the modification 22, when the size of the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, Since it differs depending on whether it is located in between, the movable body effect can be improved. In particular, when the first movable body 300 is not positioned between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, the first movable body 300 is smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, but the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Is larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, the first movable body 300 that has become larger on the player side can be shown, and a more powerful movable body effect can be provided. it can.

(Modification 23)
As in Modification 23 shown in FIG. 78, the first movable body 300 is small when entering the hole 270 of the second transmission body 260, and the first transmission body 250, the second transmission body 260, and the like. The size is larger than that of the hole 270 both when it is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and when it is located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. For example, when the first movable body 300 is not positioned between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 (for example, at the first position P1), the longitudinal length is LZ, The length in the vertical direction when positioned between the transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 (for example, when in the second position P2) is also LZ, and both are larger than the hole portion 270 (hole portion). The opening diameter of 270 (which is larger than the longitudinal length LY of the opening) If the first movable body 300 is larger than the hole 270, the first position P1 and the second position P2 are the same. It does not have to be size.

  According to the modified example 23, the first movable body 300, which is larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, temporarily becomes smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, passes through the hole 270, and reaches the second position P2. Since it becomes larger than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, it is possible to provide a movable body effect that is surprising in change. For this reason, a movable body effect can be improved.

  In the modification 22 and the modification 23, the first movable body 300 is expanded in the vertical direction. However, the first movable body 300 may be expanded or deformed in at least one of the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. Good. The first movable body 300 is configured such that at least a part of the first movable body 300 can rotate about the advance direction as a rotation axis. When the first movable body 300 rotates clockwise, the outer peripheral side is expanded by the clockwise rotation (for example, the first movable body 300). 1) When the blade portion of the movable body 300 is advanced in the radial direction or the circumferential direction, and the like, and rotating counterclockwise, the outer peripheral side is reduced by the counterclockwise rotation (for example, the first The blades of the movable body 300 may be housed in the direction of the center of rotation or the circumferential direction).

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the window 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y provided operably, and the effect display device 5X. , 5Y for controlling the display 120, the window 51 is disposed closer to the game area 10 than the first transmission body 250 and the first transmission body 250, and a hole 270 is formed. The effect control CPU 120 includes the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a standby state at a position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and a predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is rearward. It is possible to execute the third control that moves the front side through the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261 until the front transmission plate 251 is positioned on the front transmission plate 251 side.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to move the predetermined part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y until it is located closer to the first transmission body 250 than the rear transmission plate 261 of the second transmission body 260. Since an impact can be given to a person, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can move to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly inclined so as to face the center. By doing in this way, the movement of the effect display apparatuses 5X and 5Y can be shown suitably.

  In addition, after executing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a direction (left-right direction) intersecting the movement direction (front-rear direction) in the third control. Control can be performed. By doing in this way, the display content of a display part can be visually recognized other than a player.

  Further, as described above, the rear transmission plate 261 is disposed to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down between the game board surface 200A and the game ball between the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole 270 is formed at a position corresponding to an effect area (opening 2c formed in the board 200) that does not correspond to the flow area of the game ball in the game area 10. That is, since it is necessary to secure a flow-down area of the game ball, there is a limit to enlarge the hole 270, and in order to allow the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to pass through the hole 270, the effect display devices 5X, 5Y cannot be made larger than the hole 270.

  Therefore, like the present invention, after performing the third control for moving the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side, at least part of the predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (the whole in the present embodiment) By performing the fourth control to move in the direction (left-right direction) different from the moving direction (front direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmission body 260, without increasing the hole 270 more than necessary, Moreover, since the display portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be shown at a position closer to the player in front of the rear transmission plate 261, a more powerful effect can be provided to the player.

  In addition, in order to move the left and right effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side through the hole 270, the hole 270 is passed through the hole 270 after being moved toward the center once, so that the hole 270 is made larger than necessary. Without being able to pass through the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Then, after passing through the hole 270, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be further moved in the left-right direction, so that the desired position (for example, the center effect display is not limited to the position of the hole 270). The image displayed on the display unit can be shown at a position where the visual recognition of the device 5A is not hindered or concealed. In addition, after the movement, the effect display device 5A is located behind the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

  In addition, since the display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is arranged in front of the game area 10 by executing the third control, for example, not only notification of left-handed or right-handed but also provided at a predetermined position. A notification image or the like for launching the game ball toward the winning area can be displayed from the front side of the game area 10 and near the target location.

  Further, the rail member (not shown) for guiding the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is produced when the standby state changes from the standby state to the first operation state and when the first operation state changes to the second operation state. It functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between the display devices 5X and 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the production | presentation display apparatuses 5X and 5Y and the rear transmission board 261 of the 2nd transmission body 260 contact, and are damaged.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which applied the effect display apparatuses 5X and 5Y supplementarily provided in the side of the effect display apparatus 5A in which the change display of an effect symbol is possible was illustrated as an example of a display apparatus, The present invention is not limited to this, and the display device may target the effect display device 5A, or an effect display device (for example, movable) provided separately from the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. Or a display device mounted on a body or the like. Moreover, not only the display device for effects connected to the effect control board 12 in this way, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A. Various display devices connected to the main board 11 such as the second hold indicator 25B and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be used.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the presentation display apparatuses 5X and 5Y illustrated the form which moves to the front side rather than the back transmissive plate 261 in 3rd control, this invention is not limited to this, For example, The display mode of the display screen is changed according to the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (for example, the image is enlarged according to the forward movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, and the symbols and characters are changed. By performing display control (such as moving or changing the background color), it is possible to improve the rendering effect by moving the display device and changing the display image.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operation state, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261. The present invention is not limited to this, and only a predetermined portion (for example, a display portion) of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be positioned in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the fourth control, the display devices 5X and 5Y are moved in the left-right direction, and then the display unit is rotated so as to face outward. The display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be rotated so as to be along the front transmission plate 251. By doing so, the display unit is made more on the player side. It becomes possible to approach.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the presentation display apparatuses 5X and 5Y illustrated the form provided so that it was movable substantially parallel to the front-back, left-right direction, this invention is not limited to this, 3rd control In this case, it may be moved so as to incline upward or downward in the front-rear direction. Further, in the fourth control, it may be moved upward or downward.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which only the effect display apparatuses 5X and 5Y moved to the front side rather than the back transmissive board 261 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The effect display apparatus 5A and others The display device may be moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the presentation display apparatuses 5X and 5Y as a movable body illustrated the form provided in the back side of the game board 2 in the non-operating state, this invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be provided in front of the game board surface 200A of the board board 200.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the effect display apparatuses 5X and 5Y illustrated the form arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to the flow-down area | region of the game ball in the game area 10 when it sees from the front after execution of 4th control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after performing the fourth control, when viewed from the front, other than the position corresponding to the flow area of the game ball in the game area 10 (position corresponding to the effect area), That is, it is preferable to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y within an area corresponding to the hole 270.

  Further, by doing so, as described with reference to the movable body as an example in FIG. 40, for example, an operation error occurs during the operation of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, that is, during the execution of the third control and the fourth control. Or the like, and the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without touching the rear transmission plate 261, so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display device can be opened. It is possible to prevent 5X and 5Y from being damaged.

  In the above embodiment, since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved in the region corresponding to the hole 270, the opening and closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the opening / closing frame 50 is not in contact with the second transmission body when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed.

  For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11 and the main board 11 detects the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. Based on this, a door open instruction command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the standby position when the door opening designation command is received while the third control or the fourth control is being executed. Good.

  According to this, for example, when the third control and the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are executed, an operation abnormality of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y occurs, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y Even if it becomes necessary to perform maintenance by opening the opening / closing frame 50, such as when it becomes stuck on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 or a ball is clogged in the game area 10, the opening / closing frame 50 is Since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are retracted toward a position where the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are not in contact with the rear transmission plate 261 (for example, a standby position) when they are opened, the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are prevented from being damaged. it can.

  Further, when the open / close frame 50 is opened, even if a game ball staying in a daisy chain is dropped due to the clogging of the balls, the third control causes the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, that is, the front side of the game area 10. The effect display devices 5X and 5Y that have moved retreat to the standby position side, so that it is possible to avoid the dropped game balls from colliding with the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, and therefore the effect display devices 5X due to the collision with the game balls. , 5Y can be prevented from being damaged, or a game ball can be prevented from jumping due to a collision with the effect display devices 5X, 5Y and entering the back side of the board plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board board 200.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 issues a door opening designation command when executing the first control or the second control of the first movable body 300 or the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When received, not only the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved to the standby position, but the effect display being executed is interrupted, and at least the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y Until it moves to the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261, a notification (for example, “Please do not open the opening and closing frame”) is output or a message is displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Or display it).

  In addition, a lock mechanism or the like for locking the open / close frame 50 in the closed state is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the first control or the second control of the first movable body 300 or the third control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When the door opening instruction command is received while the fourth control is being executed, the opening / closing frame 50 may be restricted by being locked by a lock mechanism.

(A1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a first operation that operates to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second movement that moves to the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first position P1. The first action ACT1 moving to the second position ACT2 and the second action ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed),
The first operation and the second operation have different operation speeds (for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the first speed V1 in the first operation and the second speed V2 in the second operation are different). ).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(A2) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
Light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.),
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a first operation that operates to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second movement that moves to the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first position P1. The first action ACT1 moving to the second position ACT2 and the second action ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed),
The first operation and the second operation have different light emission modes of the light emitting means according to the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, the first light emission mode I1 in the first operation and the second operation in the second operation). Etc., which is different from the second light emission mode I2).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(A3) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a production sound;
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a first operation that operates to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second movement that moves to the second position can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first position P1. The first action ACT1 moving to the second position ACT2 and the second action ACT2 moving to the second position P2 can be executed),
The sound output of the sound output means accompanying the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 52C, the first effect sound mode (for example, the volume Vo1 in the first operation ACT1). ) And the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second action ACT2).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(A4) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A3),
Display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A, etc.) are arranged so as to be visible through the window,
The movable body can be positioned at an origin position that is a position that is not superimposed on the display means or a part that is superimposed on the display means, and is operable from the origin position to the first position or the second position. There may be.
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

(A5) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A4),
Specific game information display means (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold indication, etc.) relating to a game regardless of the position of the movable body (for example, The specific game information display area 5Z in FIG. 1 may be provided.
According to this configuration, not only a powerful movable body effect can be provided, but also the specific game information related to the game, that is, game information important to the player can be constantly shown to the player. For this reason, it can prevent that important game information becomes invisible by a movable body effect.

(A6) In the gaming machine of (A1) above,
The operation speed of the second operation may be greater than the operation speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52A is greater than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A7) In the gaming machine of (A1) above,
The operation speed of the second operation may be lower than the operation speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 52A is lower than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, failure due to the second operation of the movable body can be reduced.

(A8) In the gaming machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body,
The light emission brightness of the light emitting means is lower in the second operation than in the first operation (for example, the second luminance I2 in FIG. 52B is smaller than the first luminance I1). .
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce glare when approaching the player side.

(A9) In the gaming machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body,
The light emission brightness of the light emitting means is higher in the second operation than in the first operation (for example, the second luminance I2 in FIG. 52B is larger than the first luminance I1). .
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player more dazzling when approaching the player side, and to provide a light emitting effect with impact.

(A10) In the gaming machine (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of the volume of the production sound of the sound output means being larger, the pitch being higher, and the tempo being faster than in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. 52 (C) second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) may be larger than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1)).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A11) In the gaming machine of (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of the volume of the effect sound of the sound output means being lower, the pitch being lower, and the tempo being slower than in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. 52 (C) second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) may be smaller than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1), etc.).
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided.

(A12) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A11) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body;
The open / close door includes the window portion,
The first opening notification when the opening and closing door is opened while the movable body is operating is different from the second opening notification when the opening and closing door is opened when the movable body is not operating. It may be.
According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate treatment according to the presence or absence of the operation of the movable body when the opening / closing door is notified.

(A13) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A12),
Control means for controlling the movable body (for example, production control CPU120),
The control means includes
First control for moving the predetermined part of the movable body to the first transmission member side through the hole or the notch until the predetermined part is positioned closer to the first transmission member than the second transmission member (for example, production) The control CPU 120 is configured such that the first movable body 300 at the first standby position has a predetermined part (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 and the rear transmission plate. The first control to move to the front side until it is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than 261), and
After executing the first control, the second control that moves at least a part of the predetermined portion in a direction intersecting the moving direction in the first control (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the first control). After that, the first protrusion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302, intersects the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control (front). The second protrusion that is part of the predetermined part (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 after executing the first control and the part that can execute the second control to move in the upward direction) The second control for moving the unit 304 in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control), and the like.
It may be possible to perform.
According to this configuration, after performing the first control to move the movable body to the first transmission member side, at least a part of the predetermined portion is moved in the first control on the first transmission member side than the second transmission member. By performing the second control for moving in a direction different from the direction, it is possible to give an impact to the player, so that the effect of the production can be improved.

(A14) In the gaming machine of (A13) above,
At least a part of the predetermined portion moves in a direction different from the game area in the second control (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body 302 in the second control. The first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304, which are parts, may be moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control.
According to this structure, the movement of the movable body in 2nd control can be shown suitably.

(A15) In the gaming machine of (A13) or (A14),
Support means for supporting the movable body according to the movement of the movable body (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R that support the first movable body 300, the second In the operation mode, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R or the like that supports the first movable body 300 may be provided.
According to this configuration, it is possible to stabilize the operation of the movable body and the posture after the operation.

(A16) In any of the above gaming machines (A13) to (A15),
A second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L, 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) is provided.
The control means can perform control to move the second movable body so that the second movable body can be combined with the movable body after performing the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first control). The second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R, and the like can be controlled to move together so that the first movable body 300 can be combined).
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body support each other by combining, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

(A17) In the gaming machine of (A16) above,
When the second movable body is combined with the movable body, at least a part of the second movable body is arranged on the game area side with respect to the second transmission member (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body has a second shape). When the movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300, or when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode, these second The movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are portions arranged behind the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIGS. 35 and 36)), and so on. It may be.
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body are located at different positions in the moving direction of the movable body in the first control when they are combined, a sense of depth can be generated.

(A18) In any of the above gaming machines (A13) to (A17),
The window part (for example, the window part 51) can open and close the game area (for example, the game area 10) (see FIG. 3).
The movable body may be configured not to contact the second transmitting member when opening and closing the window (see FIG. 40).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmission member from being damaged.

(A19) In any one of the above gaming machines (A13) to (A18),
The movable body is provided with light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) capable of irradiating light other than the first transmission member after performing the first control. (See FIG. 38).
According to this configuration, the effect can be appealed not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

(A20) In any of the gaming machines (A13) to (A19) above,
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) having a gaming board (for example, gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, gaming area 10);
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and having the window portion (for example, the window portion 51);
An open / close door side light emitting component (for example, LED for production) provided in a region other than the window portion in the open / close frame;
A light emission control means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120) for performing light emission control of the light-emitting door side light-emitting component,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control includes the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable bodies 500L and 500R, and the fourth movable body. A portion in which the light emission mode of the production LED 9 can be changed to the first to fifth light emission modes according to the operation of the movable bodies 600L and 600R (see FIG. 37).
According to this structure, the movement of a movable body can be produced suitably.

(A21) In the gaming machine of (A20) above,
The light emission control means lowers the luminance after performing the first control than before performing the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode. A portion for performing control to emit light in a second light emitting mode having a lower luminance than the first light emitting mode.
(See FIG. 38).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in transparency of the movable body.

(A22) In the gaming machine of any of (A13) to (A21) above,
A gaming machine frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) having a gaming board (for example, gaming board 2) for forming the gaming area (for example, gaming area 10);
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided so as to be openable / closable with respect to the gaming machine frame and having the window portion (for example, the window portion 51);
An open / close door side light emitting component (for example, LED for production) provided in a region other than the window portion in the open / close frame;
A light emission control means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120) for performing light emission control of the light-emitting door side light-emitting component,
The door-side light-emitting component is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the movable body after performing the first control (for example, the production LED 9 is a first movable body after performing the first control. It is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward 300. (See FIG. 62 (B) of Modification 10).
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the movable body stand out with light.

(A23) In any one of the above gaming machines (A13) to (A22),
The game area (for example, the game area 10) is provided with a guide path (for example, a warp path 800) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball),
In the guide passage, at least a part of the guide passage passes through the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the notch portion, and the first transmission member is more transparent than the second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260). It may be arranged so as to be positioned on the member (for example, the first transmission body 250) side (see FIG. 61A of Modification 7).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(A24) In any one of the above gaming machines (A13) to (A23),
The game area (for example, the game area 10) is provided with a guide path (for example, the first warp path 800A, the second warp path 800B, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball),
The guide passage has a first transmission until at least a part of the guide passage is positioned on the first transmission member side with respect to the second transmission member via the hole (for example, the hole 271) or the notch. It may be moved to the member side (see FIGS. 61B and 61C of Modification 9).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(B1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The movable body operates from a first position to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and from the first position to the first transmission member and the second transmission. The second movement that moves to the second position that enters between the transmitting member and the second member can be executed (for example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, the first movable as shown in FIG. 51). The body 300 can execute the first action ACT1 that moves to the first position P1 and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of (B1) above,
The movable body can return to the origin position without performing the second operation after the execution of the first operation;
The first operation and the second operation have different expectation levels that are controlled in an advantageous state.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, the gaming machine frame 3), an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, and a door opening detection means that detects opening of the opening / closing door. With
The open / close door includes the window portion,
After the movable body performs the first operation, the second operation of the movable body is restricted based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detection means.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmission member from being damaged.

(B4) In the gaming machine of (B3) above,
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 in FIG. 45B) is that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened when there is not (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 45B).
According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate treatment according to the presence or absence of the operation of the movable body when the opening / closing door is notified.

(B5) In any of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B4),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
After the movable body performs the first action, based on the detection of the player's action by the action detecting means (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). An action effect for executing the second action of the movable body can be executed (based on operation detection).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(B6) In any of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B5),
The movable body is operable at a plurality of timings in variable display,
The execution ratio in which only the first operation is executed at the first timing and the second timing in the plurality of timings is different from the execution ratio in which the second operation is executed after the execution of the first operation (for example, 53A, only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach advance notice shown in FIG. 53A and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 53A. The execution ratio is different from the execution ratio at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1).
According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(B7) In any of the above gaming machines (B1) to (B6),
Display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A, etc.) are arranged so as to be visible through the window,
The origin position is a position where the movable body does not overlap the display means or a position where only a part of the movable body overlaps the display means.
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

(C1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The gaming machine includes acceleration advancing means (for example, a slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and a rail of the base member 700) that accelerates and moves the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. 701).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(C2) In the gaming machine of (C1) above,
The acceleration advancing means is a guide member having a downward guide path part in at least a part of a guide path part for guiding the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, a first member) The slide plate 301 of the movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(C3) In the gaming machine of (C2) above,
The downward guide path portion is formed in a downward straight line (for example, the linear rail 701 in FIG. 34) or a downward arc-shaped path (for example, the concave arc path RT1, the convex arc path RT2 in FIG. 55). ing.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(C4) In the gaming machine of (C3) above,
The guide path portion is formed to be able to swing the movable body (for example, a concave arc-shaped path RT3 in FIG. 56).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(C5) In any of the above gaming machines (C1) to (C3),
The movable body can advance to an intermediate position of the guide path portion and an advanced position advanced from the intermediate position (for example, the intermediate position PS1 and the advanced position PS2 in FIG. 57).
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is different between the case where the movable body advances to the intermediate position and the case where the movable body advances to the advanced position (for example, the first movable body 300 is set to the intermediate position PS1). The degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to be in an advantageous state is different between the case of advancement and the case of the first movable body 300 advancement to the advancement position PS2.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(C6) In any of the above gaming machines (C2) to (C5),
The window portion includes a wall portion extending in a direction connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the wall portions WL and WR in FIG. 58).
The guide path portion guides the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 as shown in a guide groove or a guide hole (for example, FIG. 58B) formed in the wall portion along the guide direction of the movable body. Downward-facing linear or arcuate guide holes WL1, WR1, etc.).
According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(C7) In any of the above gaming machines (C1) to (C6),
Acceleration support means (for example, a spring member) that supports acceleration of the movable body is provided.
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

(C8) In any of the above gaming machines (C1) to (C7),
The guide member can advance toward the hole or the notch (for example, a rail 701 (guide member) is interposed between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 through the hole 270). Etc.)
According to this configuration, a powerful movable body effect can be provided to the player.

(C9) In any of the above gaming machines (C1) to (C8),
A gaming machine main body, an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body, door opening detection means (for example, a door opening detection switch, etc.) that detects opening of the opening / closing door, With
The open / close door includes the window portion,
Based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detection means, the movable body is restricted from entering between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, an opening / closing frame by a door opening detection switch). 50, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 is limited).
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable body and the second transmission member from being damaged.

(C10) In the gaming machine of (C9) above,
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 in FIG. 45B) is that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened when there is not (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 45B).
According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate treatment according to the presence or absence of the operation of the movable body when the opening / closing door is notified.

(C11) In any of the above gaming machines (C1) to (C10),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
Based on detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on detection of operation of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or detection of operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the movable body is moved to the first position. An operation effect of entering between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member can be executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (eg, a pachinko gaming machine)
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a side surface portion (for example, the cylindrical body 252A in FIG. 62) that connects the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Etc.) from a predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B), the light emitted from the effect LED 9 passes through the tubular body 252A and is emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space S. Thus, the decoration effect for decorating the movable body can be performed by executing the first movable body 300 with light emission decoration.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D2) In the gaming machine (D1) above,
The predetermined effect is an effect capable of irradiating light from the side surface toward the movable body.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D3) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2),
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
The second transmitting member has a light incident part (for example, a light incident part 260a shown in FIG. 63) into which light can enter,
The gaming machine body includes a light emitting component (for example, an LED 9a) disposed in a facing portion (for example, the facing portion 3a) facing the light incident portion of the second transmission member,
The second transmission member is a light guide unit (for example, a light guide unit 260b) capable of guiding light incident on the light incident unit from the light emitting component to the side surface unit through the inside of the second transmission member. ) And the light from the light guide portion can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the light from the light guide portion 260b is emitted from the cylindrical body 252A. The light can be emitted from the surface on the space S side toward the first movable body 300).
According to this configuration, it is possible to achieve a decoration effect without electrically connecting the opening / closing door and the gaming machine main body.

(D4) In the gaming machine of (D1) or (D2),
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
The open / close door includes a light emitting component (for example, an LED 9a) for causing the side portion to emit light,
The light emitting component is electrically connected to the connection cable on the gaming machine body side,
Light from the light emitting component can be emitted from the side surface toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the optical path can be secured only on the opening / closing door side, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine body can be improved.

(D5) In any of the gaming machines (D1) to (D4) above,
As the decoration effect, there are a plurality of types of execution patterns (for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the effect LED 9 emits light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red). Is possible),
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of execution pattern of the decoration effect (for example, the degree of expectation is blue (expectation degree: small) <green (expectation degree: medium) <red (expectation degree: Etc.)).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D6) In any of the gaming machines (D1) to (D5) above,
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a plurality of types of operations can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the first movable body 300 rotates. , Expansion, swing, deformation, etc.), and the execution pattern of the decoration effect differs according to the plurality of types of motion (for example, multiple types of light emission according to the rotation, expansion, swing, deformation of the first movable body 300) Etc.)
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D7) In any of the gaming machines (D1) to (D6) above,
In the game area, the game area side light-emitting parts (for example, the light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winnings) different from the light-emitting parts (for example, the LED 9a shown in FIG. 63). A light emitting component (LED) of the ball device 6B, at least one of the light emitting components (LED) for causing at least a part of the surface of the game board 2 to emit light, and the like.
When the decoration effect is executed, the game area side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with lower brightness than when the decoration effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D8) In any of the gaming machines (D1) to (D7) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
On the opening / closing door, an opening / closing door-side light emitting component (for example, an LED for production 9) different from the light emitting component is disposed,
When the decoration effect is executed, the door-side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with a lower brightness than when the decoration effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D9) In any of the gaming machines (D1) to (D8) above,
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the predetermined effect can be executed. is there.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(D10) In any one of the gaming machines (D1) to (D9),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
Based on detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on detection of operation of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or detection of operation of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the mode of the predetermined effect changes. Is possible.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
A specific effect can be executed at the side surface connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, as in Modification 12 shown in FIG. 64A, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission member). A specific effect can be executed on the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the body 260).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E2) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
The side portion includes image display means (for example, image display means DP shown in FIG. 64A) that displays an image as the specific effect.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E3) In the gaming machine of (E1) above,
A projection means for projecting an image (for example, a projector),
By projecting the image from the projection means onto the side surface portion, the specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion (for example, the image from the projector is projected onto the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion). Thus, the specific effect can be executed on the cylindrical body 252A (side surface portion).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E4) In the gaming machine (E1) above,
The side surface portion guides the image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light to the inside, for example, an image light guide display means (for example, the guide of Modification 13 shown in FIG. 64B). A light plate GP).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E5) In the gaming machine (E1) above,
The side surface portion has a light guide member capable of guiding incident light (for example, a light guide member 260d of Modification 14 shown in FIG. 65A), and the like.
The specific effect is an effect in which a light emitting part provided on the light guide member emits light, or a corresponding region portion (for example, FIG. 65, the corresponding area 260e in FIG.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E6) In any of the above gaming machines (E1) to (E5),
As the specific effects, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of light emission color, luminance, and blinking interval is different).
Depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern, the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of big hit expectation) controlled to the advantageous state differs.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E7) In the gaming machine of (E5) above,
As the specific effects, a plurality of types of light emission patterns (for example, as shown in FIGS. 65B and 66B), the light emission modes in the side surface portion are gradually changed. There are a plurality of types of light emission mode patterns, etc., in which the light emission modes are different in stages),
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of big hit expectation) controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E8) In any of the above gaming machines (E1) to (E7),
The game area includes light-emitting parts on the game area side (for example, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the center decorative frame 52, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2. At least one light emitting component (LED) for emitting at least part of the light,
When the specific effect is executed, the game area side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E9) In any of the above gaming machines (E1) to (E8),
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
On the opening / closing door, an opening / closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the LED 9 for effect of the opening / closing frame 50) is disposed,
When the specific effect is executed, the open / close door side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with a lower luminance than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E10) In any of the above gaming machines (E1) to (E9),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the specific effect can be executed. is there.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E11) In the gaming machine (E4) or (E5),
Incident suppression means (for example, as shown in FIG. 63) that suppresses light from the image light guide display means or the light guide member from entering at least one of the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. A light shielding member 260c and a reflecting member).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(E12) In any of the above gaming machines (E1) to (E11),
The window includes a main body member to which the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be attached and detached.
According to this configuration, the part replacement cost can be reduced, and the window can be easily maintained.

(F1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A first movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
A second movable body different from the first movable body (for example, a movable light guide plate MGP of the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 68),
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the first movable body can enter through the notch,
The first movable body includes a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and a second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. (For example, as shown in FIG. 51, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, and the first operation ACT1 is performed. The second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 is executable),
The second movable body can be positioned at a third position between the first position and the second position of the first movable body, and when the first movable body is moved to the second position, The first movable body can move to a fourth position that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body to the second position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is between the first position P1 and the second position P2 of the first movable body 300). The first movable body 300 can be moved to a fourth position P4 that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. Etc.)
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F2) In the gaming machine of (F1) above,
The fourth position is a position closer to the first transmission member than the second position (for example, a position closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 68) or the first position. It is a position away from the moving path of the movable body (for example, a position away from the moving path of the first movable body 300 as in Modification 18 shown in FIG. 70).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F3) In the gaming machine (F1) or (F2),
The second movable body is transparent rendering means (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP in FIGS. 68 and 70) that performs light guide display when light is guided to the inside.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F4) In any of the above gaming machines (F1) to (F3),
The second movable body can be positioned at the third position when the first movable body is positioned at the first position.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F5) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F4) above,
Prior to moving the first movable body to the second position, the second movable body is moved to the fourth position.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F6) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F5) above,
Determination means for determining that the second movable body has moved to the fourth position (for example, a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP);
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first movable body can be moved to the second position.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F7) In any of the above gaming machines (F1) to (F6),
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is operable at the first position.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first movable body and the second movable body from being damaged, and to reduce the uncomfortable feeling with respect to the movable body effect.

(F8) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is not moved to the second position.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F9) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is kept stopped.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F10) In any of the above gaming machines (F1) to (F6),
When the second movable body is located at the third position and when it is located at the fourth position, the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state is different (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3). The degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to be in an advantageous state is different between when the position is set and the fourth position P4.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F11) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F10) above,
The game area includes light-emitting parts on the game area side (for example, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the center decorative frame 52, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2. At least one light emitting component (LED) for emitting at least part of the light,
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the game area side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F12) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F11) above,
A gaming machine main body (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine main body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
On the opening / closing door, an opening / closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the LED 9 for effect of the opening / closing frame 50) is disposed,
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the door-side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(F13) In any of the gaming machines (F1) to (F12),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
The movement of the second movable body to the fourth position and the movement of the first movable body to the second position can be performed based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detecting means (for example, The movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 are executable).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A window part (for example, window part 51) through which the game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300);
With
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
A transmission member operation effect for operating at least the first transmission member of the first transmission member and the second transmission member on the player side can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), A transmission member operation effect for operating only the first transparent body 250 on the player side, a transmission member operation effect for operating both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 on the player side, etc.)
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), 1 movable body 300 can be moved between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G2) In the gaming machine (G1) above,
The transmission member operation effect is an effect of operating only the first transmission member on the player side, or an effect of operating both the first transmission member and the second transmission member on the player side (for example, 73 (B), a transparent member operation effect that operates only the first transparent body 250 on the player side, and operates both the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 on the player side. Transmission member operation effect, etc.).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G3) In the gaming machine (G1) above,
As the transmission member operation effect, only the first transmission member is operated on the player side while the transmission member operation pattern is operated, and both the first transmission member and the second transmission member are operated on the player side. There is a transmission member operation pattern,
The expectation degree (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state differs between the one transmitting member operation pattern and the both transmitting member operation patterns.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G4) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G3),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
The movable body can be moved between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member based on the execution of the transmissive member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, The first movable body 300 can be moved between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G5) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G4),
The transmission member operation effect is executed and the movable body moves between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the transmission member operation effect is executed and the movable body is A second movement pattern that does not move between the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be executed (for example, the transmission member operation effect is executed, and the first movable body 300 is connected to the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission pattern. The first operation pattern that moves between the two transmission bodies 260 and the second operation that the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Pattern and so on).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G6) In the gaming machine (G5) above,
The first operation pattern and the second operation pattern differ in the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G7) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G6),
The game area includes light-emitting parts on the game area side (for example, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the center decorative frame 52, light-emitting parts (LEDs) of the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2. At least one light emitting component (LED) for emitting at least part of the light,
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the game area side light-emitting component is turned off or emitted with lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G8) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G7),
A gaming machine main body (e.g., a gaming machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (e.g., an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened and closed with respect to the gaming machine body,
The open / close door includes the window portion,
On the opening / closing door, an opening / closing door-side light emitting component (for example, the LED 9 for effect of the opening / closing frame 50) is disposed,
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the open / close door side light-emitting component is turned off or emits light with lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G9) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G7),
In the window portion, a window portion side light emitting component is disposed,
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window portion side light emitting component (for example, the window portion side light emission component of the window portion 51) is turned on or emitted with higher brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. Let
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(G10) In any of the above gaming machines (G1) to (G9),
Based on the execution of the transmission member operation effect, the detection means (for example, a first transmission body position sensor) capable of detecting that the first transmission member has moved to the player side,
Based on the detection by the detection means, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250 has moved to the player side). If detected, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 is performed, etc.).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine),
A frame (e.g., an open / close frame 50) provided with a window (e.g., window 51) through which a game area can be visually recognized;
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
The window is provided with a first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole (for example, the hole 270) or a notch is formed. A second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260), and the hole portion in a space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Or at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch,
The frame body includes operable frame side movable means (for example, the frame side movable bodies SL and SR of the modified example 21 shown in FIG. 74, the hitting ball operating handle HB shown in FIG. 75 (B), etc.)
A frame-linked effect for operating the frame-side movable means in association with the movable body entering between the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be executed (for example, the first movable body 300). ) In conjunction with entering between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, a frame-linked effect for operating the frame-side movable bodies SL, SR and the hitting ball operating handle HB).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H2) In the gaming machine of (H1) above,
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, an interlock pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and a non-interlock pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means are executed. It is possible (for example, “non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)” and “interlocking pattern (the first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are interlocked) shown in FIG. 76C). "Such).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H3) In the gaming machine of (H2) above,
The degree of expectation (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to an advantageous state differs between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H4) In any of the above gaming machines (H1) to (H3),
The timing at which the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is matched with the timing at which the operation of the frame side movable means is started.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H5) In any of the above gaming machines (H1) to (H4),
The timing for returning the movable body that has entered between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is matched with the timing for returning the frame-side movable means before the operation.
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H6) In any of the above gaming machines (H1) to (H5),
The frame side movable means is an operation means that can be operated by a player (for example, a hitting operation handle HB, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc. shown in FIG. 74),
The operation of the frame side movable means is that at least a part of the operation means is operated (for example, at least a part of the hitting operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74 is operated).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H7) In the gaming machine of (H6) above,
The operation of the operation means is at least one of vibration, swing, advance, retreat and move (for example, at least a part of the hitting operation handle HB shown in FIG. 74 is vibrated, swing, advance, At least one of a backward movement and a movement).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

(H8) In any of the above gaming machines (H1) to (H7),
Provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion,
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means, the movable body can enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 300 passes through the first transmission member). The body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can enter, for example).
According to this structure, the effect of production can be improved.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gaming ball with a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of loaned balls encapsulated inside and lent out in response to a player's loan request and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted The present invention is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored in memory. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  In the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving a variation display result to a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and according to the variation display result derived to the variation display device. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated.

  In the case of a slot machine, the game area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of symbols is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. In addition, the display device of the present invention corresponds to the above-described variable display device (for example, a reel or a liquid crystal display).

  In the embodiment, the example in which the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are used as the detection unit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-contact detection unit such as an infrared sensor or a contact detection unit such as a touch panel is used. It may be provided to detect the player's action.

  The variable display of the identification information (special drawing, effect design, general drawing, etc.) includes that the identification information blinks. For example, in the special figure, a pattern in which all the segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately included in the variable display. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed by the variable display may be a different symbol from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during the change) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

  The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine or a slot machine that encloses a game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize.

1A, 1B Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Gaming machine frame 5, 5X, 5Y, 5Z Effect display device 12 Effect control board 35A Stick origin position sensor 35B Push sensor 35C Vibration motor 36A Button sensor 37A Rocket origin position sensor 37C Rocket motor 38A to 38D Cross button sensor 39A Cover body origin position sensor 50 Open / close frame 55 Setting changeover switch 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a first mechanism and a second mechanism that is detachable from the first mechanism,
The first mechanism body has control means capable of controlling the first mechanism body and the second mechanism body, and is detachable from a plurality of types of second mechanism bodies including the specific second mechanism body,
The second mechanism body includes a plurality of detection means for detecting the state of the second mechanism body, and can output detection specific information capable of specifying the detection state of each detection means to the control means.
The control means determines whether or not the specific second mechanism is attached to the first mechanism based on detection specific information output from the second mechanism, and the specific second A gaming machine that performs notification when it is determined to be a mechanism.

Images